|
|
Charlie hopes that the new term at Bloor's Academy
will hold no nasty surprises. But then Henry Yewbeam appears, twisted through
time from the icy winter of 1916.
With the scheming Yewbeam aunts on the prowl, and the
Bloors out to catch him, Henry will need Charlie's help just to stay alive.
Bloor's Academy can be a very dangerous place. . . .
CONTENTS |
||
ENDOWED |
|
THE PETS' CAFÉ |
A GAME OF MARBLES |
|
"TAKE HIM TO THE DUNGEONS!" |
GRANDMA SLAMS A DOOR |
|
EZEKIEL'S VISITORS |
A TREE FALLS |
|
RUN OVER! |
HIDING HENRY |
|
THE TOLLROC |
OLIVIA MAKES A MESS |
|
THE WAND |
INTO THE FREEZER |
|
TANCRED AND THE TREE |
THE BLACK GLOVE |
|
AMBUSHED! |
"YOU CAN'T GO BACK!" |
|
THE TIME TWISTER |
THE THUNDER HOUSE |
|
A JOURNEY TO THE SEA |
SKARPO THE SORCERER |
|
PATON HAS A PARTY |
THE ENDOWED
These characters are all descended from the ten
children of the Red King, a magician-king who left Africa in the twelfth
century accompanied by three leopards.
The Red King had already lived for several centuries and
he made a marvelous glass sphere, putting into it all the memories of his
travels through the world. He used the sphere to twist through time, visiting
the past and the future.
In any other hands, the Time Twister is dangerous and
unpredictable.
************************************
THE CHILDREN OF THE RED KING, CALLED THE ENDOWED |
|
MANFRED BLOOR |
Head boy of
Bloor's Academy A hypnotizer. |
CHARLIE BONE |
Descended from
the Yewbeams, a family with many magical endowments, Charlie can hear the
voices of people in photographs and paintings. |
ZELDA DOBINSKI |
Descended from
a long line of Polish magicians, Zelda is telekinetic. She can move objects
with her mind. |
ASA PIKE |
Descended from
a tribe who lived in the Northern forests and had an affinity with strange
beasts, Asa can become a beast at dusk. |
BILLY RAVEN |
Descended from
a man who conversed with ravens that sat on a gibbet where dead men hung. For
this talent he was banished from his village. Billy can talk to, and
understand, animals. |
LYSANDER SAGE |
Descended from
a line of African wise men, he can call up his spirit ancestors. |
GABRIEL SILK |
Descended from
a family of psychics, Gabriel can feel scenes and emotions through the
clothes of others. |
BETH STRONG |
Descended from
a family of circus performers — strong men and acrobats. She is also telekinetic. |
EMMA TOLLY |
Descended from
the Spanish swordsman who accompanied the Red King on his journeys, Emma can
become a bird. |
TANCRED TORSSON |
Descended from
a Scandinavian storm-bringer named after the thunder god, Thor, Tancred can
bring wind, rain, thunder, and lightning. |
HINDI AND DORCAS |
Endowed. But
their gifts are, as yet, undeveloped. |
************************************
A GAME OF MARBLES
It was January 1916 — the coldest winter in living memory.
The dark rooms in Bloor's Academy were almost as cold
as the streets outside. Henry Yewbeam, hurrying down one of the icy passages,
began to hum to himself. The humming cheered him up. It warmed his spirits as
well as his feet.
On either side of the passage the eerie blue flames of
gaslights flickered and hissed in their iron brackets. The smell was horrible.
Henry wouldn't have been surprised to find something dead in one of the dark
corners.
At home, in a sunny house by the sea, his sister,
Daphne, was very ill with diphtheria. To avoid infection Henry and his
brother, James, had been sent to stay with their mother's brother, Sir Gideon
Bloor.
Sir Gideon wasn't the sort of person you would choose
to spend your holidays with. There was nothing remotely fatherly about him. He
was the headmaster of an ancient school and he never let anyone forget it.
Bloor's Academy had been in Sir Gideon's family for
hundreds of years. It was a school for children gifted in music, drama, and
art. Bloor's also took children who were endowed in other, very strange, ways.
Just thinking about them made Henry shudder.
He had reached his cousin Zeke's room. Zeke was Sir
Gideon's only child and a more unpleasant cousin Henry couldn't imagine. Zeke
was one of the endowed children, but Henry guessed that Zeke's gift was probably
nasty
Henry opened the door and peeped inside. A row of
glass jars stood on the windowsill. Inside the jars strange things writhed
gently in a clear liquid. Henry was sure it couldn't be water. The things were
pale and shapeless. One was blue.
"What do you think you are doing?"
Aunt Gudrun came marching down the passage, her long
black skirt drowning her footfalls with a sinister hiss. She was a very tall
woman with a great amount of yellow hair piled into a bun on the back of her
head. A real Viking of a person (she was, in fact, Norwegian), with an enormous
chest and lungs to match.
Henry said, "Erm . . ."
"'Erm' is not good enough, Henry Yewbeam. You
were spying in my Zeke's room, were you not?"
"No, not at all," said Henry
"You shouldn't be lurking in passages, boy Come
down to the living room." Lady Bloor beckoned with her little finger, and
Henry had no choice but to follow her.
His aunt led him back past the mysterious locked doors
that, only a few moments ago, Henry had been vainly trying to open. He was an
inquisitive boy and easily bored. A huge sigh escaped him as he trundled down a
creaking staircase to the first floor.
The Bloor family lived in the west wing of the academy
but they only occupied the rooms above the ground floor, which was almost
entirely taken up by a drafty grand hall, a chapel, and several assembly halls
and classrooms. Henry had already explored some of these rooms and found them
very disappointing. All they contained were rows of battered desks and chairs,
and shelves of dusty-looking books.
"Here we are!" Lady Bloor opened a door and
thrust Henry into the room beyond.
A small boy who had been kneeling in the window seat,
leaped down and rushed across to Henry "Where've you been?" he cried.
"Just exploring," said Henry
"I thought you'd gone home."
"Home is miles and miles away Jamie." Henry
plunked himself in a deep leather chair beside the fire. The logs in the big
iron grate smoldered with strange images. When Henry half-closed his eyes he
could almost see the cozy living room at home. He sighed again.
Aunt Gudrun frowned at Henry and said, "Behave
yourselves, boys." She went out, closing the door behind her.
When she had gone, James came and sat on the arm of
Henry's chair. "Zeke's been doing funny things," lie whispered.
Henry hadn't noticed Zeke, but now he became aware of
his strange cousin, enclosed in a gloomy silence at the other end of the room.
He was sitting at a table, absorbed in something laid out before him. His pale,
bony face was frozen in an attitude of intense concentration. Not a muscle twitched, not a breath escaped him.
"I was scared," James said quietly
"Why? What did he do?" Henry asked in a
hushed voice.
"Well, he was doing a puzzle. There were pieces
all over the table. Then Zeke stared at them and they all crawled together.
Well, most of them. They made a picture. He showed it to me. It was a ship, but
some of the pieces wouldn't fit."
"It's rude to whisper," said Zeke, without
taking his eyes off the puzzle.
Henry pulled himself out of the chair and strolled
over to his cousin. He glanced at the twelve pieces lying beside the puzzle
and then at the picture of the ship. It took less than a minute for him to see
exactly where each piece fit.
"Hm," said Henry and without another word he
picked up the single pieces, one by one, and deftly placed them into the
picture; two in the sky three in the ship's hull, two in the rigging, and four
in the sea.
For a moment Zeke watched Henry's hands in fascination.
It was only when Henry was putting the last piece in place, that Zeke suddenly
leaped up, crying, "Who asked you? I could have done it. i could!"
"Sorry," said Henry stepping back. "I
thought you wanted some help."
"Henry's good at puzzles," said James.
"Well I'm good at other things," snarled
Zeke.
James was too small to see the danger signs. The angry
glitter in Zeke's black eyes went straight over his head. "Magic doesn't
always work," the little boy said blithely "Henry's cleverer than you
are, Zeke."
With that remark poor James Yewbeam sealed his brother's
fate and, of course, his own.
"Get out!" cried Zeke. "Both of you.
Hateful Yewbeams. Go, now. I can't stand the sight of you!"
Henry and James ran for the door. There was a violent
gleam in their cousin's pale face, and they didn't want to wait around for him
to do something nasty
"Where are we going?" panted James as he
tore down the passages after his brother.
"We'll go to the big hall, Jamie. We can play
marbles there." Henry pulled a small leather bag out of his pocket and
waved it at his brother.
It wasn't to be. Before they could go any further,
there was a shout from Aunt Gudrun.
"James, bedtime." James pretended not to
hear her. "Now, this minute."
"Better go," said Henry gently "She'll
punish you if you don't."
"But I want to play marbles," said James.
Henry shook his head. "Sorry Jamie. Not now Tomorrow.
But I'll come and read to you later."
"Promise? Will you finish the story of the
Wallypug?"
"James, come here," shouted Aunt Gudrun.
"I promise," said Henry and he meant to keep
his promise. But Zeke had other plans for him.
Hanging his head, James trailed back toward the tall
figure at the end of the passage.
"And you, Henry!" called Aunt Gudrun.
"You keep out of trouble."
"Yes, Aunt," said Henry
He was about to descend the rather grand staircase
down to the hall when he had an idea. It was already so chilly he could see
his own breath, billowing away from him in little gray clouds. The great hall
would be even colder. He might freeze to death.
Henry retraced his steps until he found the door to a
room he had already investigated. It was a huge storeroom, full of clothes left
behind by past students of the academy There were rows of colored capes: blue,
green, and purple; shelves of hats and suits, and boxes of ancient leather
boots.
Henry selected a warm blue cape and put it on. It
reached well over his knees, a perfect length for a drafty hall. He would be
able to kneel on it without feeling the cold stone floor.
Henry descended into the hall. His collection of
marbles was the envy of all his friends. Henry's father traveled extensively
and never came home without at least one precious new marble for his son's
collection. Henry's leather bag held onyx stones, polished agate, glass,
limestone, quartz, and even spheres of painted china.
There were no lights in the hall but an early moon
sparkled through the long, frosted windows, giving the gray stones a soft
pearly glow
Henry decided to play Ring Taw his favorite game.
Deprived of an opponent, he would try to improve his skill by playing alone.
With a piece of chalk, kept handy in his pocket, Henry drew a large ring in the
center of the hall. He then chalked a smaller ring inside the first. Selecting
thirteen marbles from his bag, he placed them in a cross inside the smaller
circle.
Now Henry had to kneel on the icy floor, just outside
the large ring. Already his hands were blue with cold and he could hardly stop
his teeth from rattling. Tucking the blue cape under his knees he took out his
favorite marble; it was a clear blue with a silvery glint inside it, like
starlight. This was always his taw or shooter.
Placing the knuckles of his right hand, palm outward,
on the floor, Henry put the blue taw on the tip of his first finger and flicked
it with his thumb toward the marble cross. With a sharp clink it hit an orange
marble right out of the two circles.
"Bravo!" Henry shouted.
There was a light creak from behind him. Henry
squinted into the deep shadows on the oak-paneled walls. Was he imagining it,
or did a long tapestry shiver slightly? On the other side of the tapestry a
small door led into the west wing. Henry preferred the main staircase, for the
passage behind the door was dark and creepy
A cold draft swept past his knees and the tapestry
billowed again. A flurry of hailstones clattered against the windows, and the
wind gave a sudden moan as it rushed around the snowy courtyard.
"Wind." Henry shivered and drew his cape
closer. For good measure he even pulled the hood over his head.
In the passage behind the tapestry Ezekiel Bloor stood
with a lantern in one hand, and in the other — a glowing glass sphere. Dazzling
colors swirled out of the glass; a rainbow laced with gold and silver. Sunshine
and moonlight, one after the other. Zeke knew he mustn't look at them. He held
one of the oldest marbles in the world.
On her deathbed, Zeke's Great-aunt Beatrice, a witch
if ever there was one, had pressed the marble into his hand. "The Time
Twister," she said in her cracked, dying voice. "For journeys through
time. Do not look on it, Ezekiel, unless you want to travel."
Ezekiel didn't want to travel. He thrived in the great
gloomy building that was his home and could seldom be persuaded to leave it.
However, he longed to know what would happen if someone did look into the Time
Twister. No one, in Zeke's opinion, was more deserving of a shove through time
than his wretched cousin Henry Yewbeam.
Henry had by now knocked another three marbles out of
the small chalked ring. He hadn't missed once, in spite of his freezing
fingers. He was just stepping back to his place outside the circle when a
glass ball came rolling toward him. It was slightly larger than Henry's blue
taw and tiny points of colored light danced and shimmered all around it.
"Oh my," breathed Henry He stood where he
was while the strange marble rolled on until it reached his foot.
Henry picked it up. He gazed into the bright depths
within the glass. He saw domes of gold, cities in sunlight, cloudless skies,
and much, much more. But even as he watched the scenes taking place before his eyes,
Henry became aware that a change was taking place within his body and he knew
that he shouldn't have looked upon those unbelievable and breathtaking scenes.
The oak-paneled walls were breaking up. The frosted
moonlight was fading. Henry's head whirled and his feet began to float. Far,
far away a cat began to meow And then another cat, and another.
Henry thought of his small brother. Would there be
time to reach him before he faded away completely? And if he did, and James
saw a brother disappearing before his eyes, might he not be so frightened he
would have nightmares forever? Henry decided to leave a message.
While he still had the strength, he took the chalk from his pocket and with his left hand (the right was still clamped around the Time Twister) he wrote on
the Stone floor, "SORRY, JAMES. THE
MARBLES . . ."
It was all Henry had time for. The next moment he had
left the year of his eleventh birthday and was traveling forward, very fast, to
a year when most of the people he knew would be dead.
************************************
In a small, chilly room at the top of the west wing,
James waited for his brother. He was so cold he had put his coat on over his
flannel nightshirt. On the table beside him the flame from his candle quivered
in a draft from the door. Where was Henry? Why was he taking so long?
James rubbed his eyes. He was very tired but too cold
to sleep. He drew the bedcovers up to his chin and listened to the patter of
freezing sleet against the windowpane. And then his candle went out.
James sat rigid in his bed, too frightened to call
out. Aunt Gudrun would be cross and Cousin Zeke would tease him for being a
baby Only Henry would understand.
"Henry! Henry where are you?" James closed
his eyes and sobbed into his pillow.
Before he had completely run out of tears, James
stopped shivering. The room was getting warmer. He opened his eyes and found
that he could see his pillow his hand, the window A soft glow had spread
across the ceiling. When James looked to see where it was coming from, he was
amazed to find that three cats were silently pacing around his bed. One was orange,
another yellow, and the third a bright coppery color.
As soon as the cats knew they had been observed, they
jumped up and rubbed their heads against the boy's cold hands, his neck, and
his cheek. Their gleaming fur was as warm as sunlight, and as James stroked
them, his fear began to leave him. He decided to go and look for Henry Hardly
had this thought entered his head than the cats leaped off the bed and ran to
the door. They waited, meowing anxiously as James pulled on his socks and his
small leather boots.
With light sparkling on their silver whiskers and
bright fur tips, the cats led the way down the dark passages and narrow steps,
while James hurried after them. At last he came to the wide staircase leading
clown into the hall. Here the cats' worried meowing became loud and urgent, and
James hesitated before he descended into the vast moonlit room.
Henry was not there. His marbles lay scattered on the
stone floor, winking in the bright frosted light from the windows. As James
moved slowly down the stairs, the cats ran before him, wailing and growling.
James reached the bottom step and walked to the
chalked circle. He could see that Henry had been playing Ring Taw his favorite
game.
"Henry!" James called. "Henry where
have you gone?"
Never had a place appeared so vast and empty to small
James Yewbeam. Never had his brother's absence seemed so utterly complete. He
wouldn't try to call again. It was quite clear that Henry was gone. And he
hadn't even said good-bye.
Before the tears could fall again, the three cats
pounced into the white circle, drawing the boy's attention to four words
chalked on the floor. A message? If only James could read. Henry had been patiently
trying to teach him for weeks, but, so far, James hadn't managed a single word.
Perhaps he hadn't really tried. Now, when it was a serious
matter . . .
"S . . . s . . . s . . . ," murmured James
as the cats paced along the row of letters.
Next came an "o" and then two
"r"s, and further on his own name. And all at once James found he
could understand the words his brother had left for him.
"SORRY, JAMES," he read, "THE MARBLES . . ." There the message
ended.
Obviously Henry wanted his brother to keep the marbles
safe for him. James picked up the leather bag but before he could reach the
blue taw the orange cat tapped it playfully and it sped across the hall. The yellow cat raced after it while the
copper cat swept another
three marbles out of the ring.
Now the great hall was alive with the sound of clinking
glass and joyful purring. James was
surrounded by
dancing,
glistening spheres of color. The cats were playing a game and, as he watched them, a big
smile broke
over the boy's face.
"Stay with me," James begged the cats.
The cats would stay. For as long as he was in that cold, dreary
building, they would keep James Yewbeam as warm and safe as any small boy had a
right to expect.
GRANDMA SLAMS A DOOR
Winter held the city in an iron fist. Roofs, trees,
chimneys, and even things that moved were covered in a thick crust of frozen
snow.
Charlie Bone had been looking forward to an extra day
of Christmas vacation. The new term surely couldn't start in this weather. But
Grandma Bone had dashed his hopes.
"No shirking for you," she said in her usual
sneering way "Bloor's Academy opens come rain, wind, or snow. The
snowplows have cleared the main road, and the school bus will stop at the top
of Filbert Street on Monday morning at eight o'clock sharp." Her lips made
a nasty backfiring noise as she said the last word.
Charlie was a weekly boarder at Bloor's Academy and on
Sunday nights he had to pack a bag for five days away from home. On this
particular Sunday Charlie was paying more attention to the snowflakes brushing
his window than to his packing.
"Pajamas, toothbrush, pants," Charlie
muttered to himselfI'socks, clean shirts. . . ." He scratched his head. He
was supposed to wear a blue cape to school but he hated putting it on before he
got to the academy The other children on Filbert Street snickered at him.
Bloor's was a rather unusual school. Only children who were talented in music,
art, or drama could get in. Charlie had none of these talents. He was one of
the twelve endowed children who were there because of unique other gifts. In
his case it was a gift he often thought he would rather be without. He could
hear photographs, or rather the people in them. As soon as Grandma Bone and her
three nasty sisters found out, they had packed him off to Bloor's. Theirs was a
family of clairvoyants, hypnotizers, werewolves, witches, and worse. They were
descended from a mysterious Red King, a magician of amazing powers and, like
all endowed children, Charlie must be watched, his talent nurtured.
The doorbell rang and Charlie ran downstairs, eager to
escape the dreary packing. As soon as he opened the door his friend Benjamin's
dog, Runner Bean, pushed past Charlie and began to shake wet snow off his back.
His feathery tail sent sprays of water flying across the hall, straight into
the path of Charlie's other grandma, Maisie Jones.
"You'd better dry that dog in here," said
Maisie cheerfully as she stepped back into the kitchen. "I'll fetch his
towel." She kept a special towel for Runner Bean, who was a frequent visitor.
The big yellow dog bounded after her while Charlie
took Benjamin's coat and hung it on the hall stand.
"Are you on for building a snowman
tomorrow?" Benjamin asked Charlie. "Our school definitely won't
open."
"Mine will," said Charlie gloomily
"Sony Ben."
“Aw!" Benjamin's face fell. He was a small
straw-haired boy with a permanently anxious expression. "Couldn't you
pretend to be sick or something?"
"No chance," said Charlie. "You know
what Grandma and the aunts are like."
Benjamin knew only too well. Charlie's aunt Eustacia
had once been Benjamin's sitter. It was the worst two days of his life:
disgusting food, early bedtimes, and no dogs in bedrooms. Benjamin shuddered
at the memory. "OK," he said sadly "I guess I can make a snowman
on my own."
A door opened on the landing above them and a voice
called out, "Is that you, Benjamin Brown? I can smell dog."
"Yes, it's me, Mrs. Bone," said Benjamin
with a sigh.
Grandma Bone appeared at the top of the stairs.
Dressed all in black and with her white hair piled high on her head, she looked
more like the wicked queen from a legend than someone's grandmother.
"I hope you don't intend to stay more than ten
minutes," said Grandma Bone. "Charlie has to have an early night.
It's school tomorrow"
"Mom says I can have another hour," Charlie
shouted up to his grandmother.
"Oh? Oh, well, if that's the case, why should I
bother to take an interest in your welfare. I'm clearly wasting my time."
Grandma Bone swept back into her room, slamming the door behind her.
Whether it was this door-slamming or a minor earth
tremor, Charlie would never know but something caused a small picture to fall
from its hook in the hall.
Charlie had never studied the faded old photographs
that adorned the walls of the dark hallway In fact, since he had discovered his
unwelcome talent, he had positively avoided them; he didn't want to hear what a
group of crusty-looking forebears had to say
"Well!" exclaimed Benjamin. "How did
that happen?"
Charlie realized this was a photograph he wouldn't be
able to avoid. As he picked it up and turned it over, he felt a strange
fluttering in his stomach.
"Let's see!" said Benjamin.
Charlie held out the black-framed picture. It was one
of those faded sepia-colored photographs. The glass was cracked but hadn't
fallen out, and through the cracks the boys could make out a family of five,
grouped together in a garden. Behind them, the yellowed wall of a cottage
could be glimpsed, and on the other side of the photo, beyond a stone wall, a
small sailing boat sat on a velvety sea.
“Are you OK?" Benjamin glanced at Charlie.
"No," muttered Charlie. "You know why
Oops, here we go." Already a thin buzz of voices was coming through to
him.
It was the mother who spoke first. Henry, stand still You'll spoil the picture. She was a pretty woman in a
lacy dress with a high collar. A brooch, like a star, was pinned just beneath
her chin. A boy of about four sat on her lap, and a girl of perhaps six or
seven leaned against her knee.
Beside the woman stood a man in a soldier's uniform.
He had such a merry face Charlie couldn't imagine him with the fierce and
solemn look a soldier was supposed to have. But it was the boy standing in
front of the soldier, who held Charlie's gaze.
I can't
breathe, muttered
the boy
"Hey Charlie, he looks a bit like you!"
Benjamin pointed a grubby finger at the older boy
"Mm!" Charlie agreed. "Same age as me,
too."
A stiff white collar seemed to be giving the boy
called Henry some trouble. It was clamped around his neck above a tightly
buttoned jacket, and almost brushed his chin. He wore knee-length pants, long,
black socks, and shiny black boots.
Ouch! muttered Henry
His mother sighed. Is if too much to ask you to stand still?
I think
there's a fly under my collar, said Henry
At this the soldier burst out laughing, and Henry's
brother and sister dissolved into helpless giggles.
Really, said the serious mother. I'm sure our poor photographer doesn't find it
amusing. Are you all right, Mr. Caldicott?
There was a mumbled, Yes, thank you, madam, and then something fell over.
Charlie couldn't be sure if it was Mr. Caldicott or the camera. The figures in
the photograph swung all over the place, making Charlie feel quite dizzy
“You look green," Benjamin remarked. He led the
rather shaken Charlie into the kitchen, where Maisie was rubbing Runner Bean
with a towel.
"Oh dear," said Maisie, taking in the
situation at a glance. "Have you had one of your thingies, Charlie?"
"He has," said Benjamin.
There was a loud sizzle as Charlie's mother, Amy
dropped an exotic-looking vegetable into a frying pan. "What was it this
time, love?" she asked.
Charlie put the photograph on the kitchen table.
"This fell off the wall when Grandma Bone slammed her door."
"It's a wonder there are any doors left hanging
in this house, the way that woman slams them," said Maisie, emptying the
cracked glass into a newspaper. "What with the slamming and your Uncle
Paton's lightbulbs, and your mom's rotten vegetables, I sometimes think I'd be
better off in a home for the elderly"
Everyone ignored this remark. They'd all heard it so
often. Maisie wasn't old enough to be in a home, and she'd been told a hundred
times that her family couldn't live without her.
"So do you know who these people are?"
Charlie pointed to the family in the black frame. Without the cracked glass,
the soldier and his family could be seen more clearly
Charlie's mother came and looked over his shoulder.
"They must be Yewbeams," she said, "Grandma Bone's relations.
You'd better ask her."
"No way," said Charlie. "I'll ask Uncle
Paton before I go to bed. Come on, Ben."
Tucking the black frame under his arm, Charlie led
Benjamin and Runner Bean up to his room. An hour playing computer games passed
very quickly and then Grandma Bone was hammering on Charlie's door and telling
him, "Get that dog off your bed." How did she guess? But then a lot
of the Yewbeams had powers.
The boys trailed downstairs with Runner Bean behind
them, and Charlie let Benjamin and his dog out of the front door.
He stood in the hall a moment, staring at the rectangle
of pale wallpaper where the framed photograph had hung. What had caused that
photo to fall? Could it really have been a door being slammed? In this house
the force at work was bound to be more mysterious.
"Perhaps Uncle Paton will know;" Charlie murmured.
He ran upstairs.
Uncle Paton was Grandma Bone's brother, but he was
twenty years younger, and had a good sense of humor. He also had a talent for
exploding lightbulbs when he got near them, so he spent most of the day in his
room and only went out after dark. Even in the daytime, lights were on in shop
windows. At night he was not so easily seen.
Charlie retrieved the photograph from his room, and
knocked on his uncle's door, ignoring the permanent@ DO NOT DISTURB sign.
There was no response to his first knock, but his
second drew an irritated, "What is it?"
"It's about a photo, Uncle Paton."
"Are you hearing voices again?"
'"Fraid so."
"Come in, then." This was said in a weary
tone.
An extremely tall man with a great amount of untdy
black hair looked up from a desk by the window As he moved, his elbow sent a
stack of books toppling to the floor.
"Bother," said the tall man, "and other
more rude things."
Paton was writing a history of his family the Yewbeams,
and he needed a great many books to help him do it.
"Where's the photo, then? Come on, show
show!" Paton clicked his fingers impatiently
Charlie laid the photo in front of his uncle.
"Who are they?"
Paton squinted at the family group. “Ah, that's my
lather." He pointed to the small boy sitting on his mother's knee.
"And that," putting an ink-stained linger beside the girl,
"that's poor Daphne who died of diphtheria. The soldier is my grandfather,
Colonel Manley Yewbeam — a very merry man. He was on leave from the army There
was a war on, you know And that's my grandmother Grace. She was an artist — a
very good one."
“And the other boy?"
"That's . . . good lord, Charlie, he looks rather
like you. I never realized that before."
"His hair is different. But I suppose he could
have had it squashed down with something." No amount of squashing would
keep Charlie's thick, wiry hair flat.
"Hmm. Poor Henry" muttered Paton. "He
disappeared."
"How?" Charlie was amazed.
"They were staying at Bloor's, Henry and James,
while their sister, Daphne, was dying. It was the coldest winter for a century
my father has never forgotten it. One day in the middle of a game of marbles,
Henry just vanished." Paton stroked his chin. "My poor father.
Suddenly he was an only child. He idolized his brother."
"Vanished," murmured Charlie. “And now he's
talking to me."
"My father always suspected his cousin Ezekiel
had something to do with it. He was jealous of Henry Ezekiel was a magician,
but Henry was just naturally clever."
"Is that the Ezekiel who's . . . ?"
"Yes. Dr. Bloor's grandfather. He's still there,
festering away somewhere in the academy surrounded by gas lamps and bad
magic."
"Wow! So he's about a hundred years old."
“At least," said Paton. He leaned forward.
"Tell me, Charlie, these voices you hear, do they ever say anything that
isn't directly connected to that moment in time when they are being
photographed?"
"Erm, no," said Charlie. "Not yet. I
don't like looking at them for too long."
"Mm, pity," said Paton. "Could be
interesting. Here you are, then." He held out the photograph.
"No, thanks," said Charlie. "You keep
it."
Paton looked disappointed. "My father would be so
happy to know a little more."
"Is he still alive, then?" Charlie was
surprised. He'd never seen his great-grandfather. In fact, he'd never heard
anyone speak of him.
"He's a grand old fellow" said Paton.
"He's in his nineties now but he still lives in that very same cottage by
the sea." He tapped the photograph. "1 visit him every month. If I
start at midnight, I can be there before sunup."
"What about Grandma and the aunts? They're his
daughters, aren't they?"
Uncle Paton made one of his
here-comes-a-bit-of-scandal expressions. His thin lips compressed and his long
black eyebrows arched up toward his hairline. "There was a rift, Charlie.
A terrible quarrel. Long, long ago. I can hardly remember what caused it. For
them our father doesn't exist."
"That's awful!" But somehow Charlie wasn't
surprised. After all, Grandma Bone wouldn't even speak of Lyell, her only son
and Charlie's father, when he disappeared. She had simply sliced him out of her
heart.
Charlie said good night to his uncle and went to bed.
But as he lay awake, trying to imagine his first day back at Bloor's, Henry
Yewbeam's mischievous face kept breaking into his thoughts. How had he disappeared?
And where did he go?
A TREE FALLS
The temperature dropped several degrees during the
night. On Monday morning an icy wind sent clouds of sleet whipping down Filbert
Street, blinding anyone brave enough to venture out.
"I can't believe I've got to go to school in
this," Charlie muttered as he struggled through the wind.
"You'd better believe it, Charlie, there's the
bus! Good luck!" Amy Bone blew Charlie a kiss then turned onto a side
street and made her way toward the greengrocer's. Charlie ran up to the top of
Filbert Street where a blue bus was waiting to collect music students for
Bloor's Academy
Charlie'd been put in the music department only
because his father had been in it. His friend Fidelio, on the other hand, was
brilliant. Fidelio had saved a seat for Charlie on the bus, and as soon as
Charlie saw his friend's bright mop of hair and beaming face, he felt better.
"This semester's going to seem very boring,"
sighed Fidelio, "after all that excitement."
"I don't think I mind a bit of boringness,"
said Charlie. "I'm certainly not going in the ruined castle again."
The bus parked at one end of a cobbled square with a
fountain of stone swans in the center. As the children left the bus, they
noticed that icicles hung from the swans' beaks and their wings were laced with
frost. They appeared to be swimming on a frozen pool.
"Look at that," Charlie exclaimed as he
passed the fountain.
"The dormitory's going to be like a fridge,"
Fidelio said grimly
Charlie wished he'd packed a hot-water bottle.
Another bus had pulled up in the square. This one was
purple and a crowd of children in purple capes came leaping down the steps.
"Here she comes!" said Fidelio as a girl
with indigo-colored hair came flying toward them.
"Hi, Olivia!" called Charlie.
Olivia Vertigo clutched Charlie's arm. "Charlie,
good to see you alive. You, too, Fido!"
"It's good to be alive," said Fidelio.
"What's with the Fido?"
"I decided to change your name," said
Olivia. "Fidelio's such a mouthful and Fido's really cool. Don't you like
it?"
"It's a dog's name," said Fidelio. "But
I'll think about it."
Children in green capes had now joined the crowd. The
art pupils were not as noisy as the drama students, and not so flamboyant and
yet when their green capes flew open, a glimpse of a sequined scarf, or gold
threaded into a black sweater; made one suspect that more serious rules would
be broken by these quiet children than by those wearing blue or purple.
The tall gray walls of Bloor's Academy now loomed
before them. On either side of the imposing arched entrance, there was a tower
with a pointed roof and, as Charlie approached the wide steps up to the arch,
he found his gaze drawn to the window at the top of one of the towers. His
mother said she had felt someone watching her from that window, and now Charlie
had the same sensation. He shivered slightly and hurried to catch up with his
friends.
They had crossed a paved courtyard and were now
climbing another flight of steps. At the top, two massive bronze-studded doors
stood open to receive the throng of children.
Charlie's stomach gave a lurch as he passed through
the doors. He had enemies in Bloor's Academy and, as yet, he wasn't quite sure
why Why were they trying to get rid of him? Permanently
A door beneath two crossed trumpets led to the music
department. Olivia waved and disappeared through a door under two masks, while
the children in green made their way to the end of the hall where a pencil
crossed with a paintbrush indicated the art department.
Charlie and Fidelio went first to the blue coatroom
and then on to the assembly room.
As one of the smallest boys Charlie had to stand in
the front row, beside the smallest of all, a white-haired albino called Billy
Raven. Charlie asked him if he had enjoyed Christmas but Billy ignored him. He
was an orphan and Charlie hoped he hadn't had to spend his holiday at Bloor's.
A fate worse than death in Charlie's opinion. He noticed that Billy was wearing
a pair of fur-lined boots. A Christmas present, no doubt.
They were only halfway through the first hymn when
there was a shout from the stage.
"Stop!"
The orchestra ground to a halt. The singing died.
Dr. Saltweather, head of the music department, paced
across the stage, arms folded across his chest. He was a big man with a lot of
white, wiry hair. The row of music teachers standing behind him looked
apprehensive. Dr. Saltweather was just as likely to shout at them as the
children.
"Do you call that singing?" roared Dr.
Saltweather. "It's a horrible moan. It's a disgraceful whine. You're
musicians, for goodness sake. Sing in tune, give it some life! Now — back to the
beginning, please!" He nodded to the small orchestra at the side of the
stage and raised his baton.
Charlie cleared his throat. He couldn't sing at the
best of times, but today the assembly room was so cold he couldn't stop his jaw
from shaking. The temperature had affected the other children as well,
even the best singers were hunched and
shivering under their blue capes.
They started up again, and this time Dr. Saltweather
couldn't complain. The old paneled walls vibrated with sound. Even the teachers
were doing their best. Merry Mr. O'Connor threw back his head and sang heartily
Miss Chrystal and Mrs. Dance smiled and swayed, while old Mr. Paltry frowned
with concentration. The piano teacher, Mr. Pilgrim, however, did not even open
his mouth.
Charlie realized that Mr. Pilgrim was not standing up.
He was next to Mrs. Dance, who was extremely small, and being very tall
himself, it was not immediately apparent that he was still sitting down. What
was wrong with him? He never looked you in the eye, never spoke, never walked
in the grounds like other teachers. He seemed to be completely unaware of his
surroundings, and his pale face never showed the slightest flicker of emotion.
Until now
Mr. Pilgrim was staring at Charlie and Charlie had the
oddest sensation that the teacher knew him, not as a student, but someone else.
It was as if the dark, silent man was trying to recognize him.
There was a sudden, violent crack from beyond the
window It was so loud they could hear it above their boisterous singing. Even
Dr. Saltweather paused in his conducting. Another crack resounded over the snow
outside, and then a tremendous thump shook the walls and windows.
Dr Saltweather put down his baton and strode to one of
the long windows. When some of the children followed he didn't bother to stop
them.
"Good grief!" exclaimed Dr. Saltweather.
"Look at the old cedar!"
The huge tree now lay halfway across the garden; its
branches broken and its tangled roots pulled clear off the ground. There was
another crack as a long branch supporting the crown of the tree finally broke,
and with a horrible groan the trunk sank into the snow
So many games had been played under its sweeping
branches, so many whispered secrets kept safe by its wide shadow It was every
child's favorite tree, and now it was gone, and in its place there was only a
wide expanse of snow and an unbroken view to the ramparts of the ruined castle.
Snow encrusted the top of the walls and clung to the uneven surfaces, but the
blood red of the great stones stood out ominously in the white landscape.
As Charlie stared at the castle walls, something
happened. It could have been a trick of the light, but he was sure another
tree, smaller than the cedar, appeared in the arched entrance to the castle.
Its leaves were red and gold and yet other trees had lost their autumn colors.
"Did you see that?" Charlie whispered to
Fidelio.
"What?"
“A tree moved," said Charlie. "Look, now
it's standing by the castle wall. Can't you see it?"
Fidelio frowned and shook his head.
Charlie tried to blink the tree away But when he
looked again it was still there. No one else appeared to have seen it. Charlie
had a familiar fluttery feeling in his stomach. It always happened when he
heard the voices, but this time there had been no voices.
A bang from the stage made him look back. Mr. Pilgrim
had gotten to his feet very suddenly knocking over his chair. He gazed over the
heads of the children into the garden beyond the window He could have been
looking at the fallen tree, but Charlie was sure he was staring past to the red
walls of the castle. Had he seen the strange, moving tree?
Dr. Saltweather swung away from the window. “Next hymn, children," he said as he
marched back to the stage. "You'll never get to your classes at this
rate."
After assembly Charlie had his lesson with Mr. Paltry—Wind.
Mr. Paltry was an impatient, elderly flautist. Teaching Charlie Bone to play
the recorder was like trying to fill a bucket with a hole in it, he complained.
The old man sighed frequently polished his glasses, and wasn't above whacking
the recorder while Charlie was in midblow Charlie reckoned that if Mr. Paltry
continued attacking him in this way he would eventually lose his teeth and then
perhaps he would he released from his horrible music lessons.
"Go, Bone, go!" Mr. Paltry grunted after
forty minutes of mutual torture.
Charlie went very happily Next it was on with the
hoots and out into the snowy garden. In cold weather the children were allowed
to wear their capes outside; in summer, capes had to be left in the coatroom.
Fidelio was late arriving from his violin lesson, so
when the two boys finally ran outside, the snow had already been trampled by
three hundred children. Snowmen were
being built, snowball fights were in progress, and Mr. Weedon, the gardener,
was trying to shoo children away from the fallen tree.
"1 want to see something by the
castle," Charlie told Fidelio.
"You said you didn't want to go near it,"
his friend reminded him.
"No, but. . . it's like I said, I saw something.
I want to know if there are any footprints."
"OK." Fidelio gave a good-natured shrug.
As they ran past the fallen cedar, Billy Raven called
out, "Where are you going, you two?"
Almost without thinking, Charlie shouted, "None
of your business."
The albino scowled and shrank against the dark
branches of the tree. His ruby-colored eyes flashed behind the thick lenses of
his glasses.
"Why did you say that?" Fidelio asked as
they hurried on.
"I couldn't help it," said Charlie.
"There's something wrong with Billy Raven. I don't trust him."
They had reached the entrance to the ruined castle.
The snow beneath the huge arch was clear and smooth. No one had been in or out
of the ruin.
Charlie frowned. "I saw it," he murmured.
"Let's go in," said Fidelio.
Charlie hesitated.
"It doesn't look so bad in daylight," said
Fidelio, peering through the arch. He bounded in and Charlie followed. They
tramped across a courtyard and took one of the five passages that led deeper
into the ruin.
After several minutes of shuffling through the dark,
they emerged into another courtyard. That's where they saw the blood. Or
something like it. A few deep red flecks lay in the snow beside a patch of
red-gold leaves.
"The beast!" cried Charlie. "Let's get
out."
It was only when they were standing safely outside
the walls again that Fidelio said, "It might not have been the
beast."
"There was blood," said Charlie. “And it was
the beast. It's killed something. Or wounded it."
"But there were no other marks, Charlie. No sign
of a fight, or footprints . . . or . . ."
Charlie didn't wait to hear the rest of his friend's
very reasonable doubts. He raced away from the ruin as if he were reliving the
long night when a yellow-eyed beast had chased him through the endless passages
and cold, echoing chambers. When he reached the fallen tree he waited for
Fidelio to catch up with him.
"Clear off you!" said a deep voice behind
him.
Already nervous, Charlie jumped and swung around. Mr.
Weedon's red face appeared through the mesh of broken branches; he was wearing
a shiny black helmet and Charlie caught the glint of a saw held in the big
man's black gauntlet.
"This tree's dangerous," said Mr. Weedon.
"I've told you kids not to play here."
"I wasn't playing," said Charlie. Fidelio
had caught up with him and he felt a little more confident.
"Oh, no. Not you, Charlie Bone. You never play do
ya? A very serious boy aren't cha?"
"You don't know anything about me," Charlie
said angrily "You can't . . ."
There was a loud roar followed by a grinding noise as Mr. Weedon made his way
through the tangle of branches toward Charlie. Twigs flew in all directions as the
saw bit through wood and foliage.
"Come on!" Fidelio pulled at Charlie's cape.
"Let's get out of here."
"That man's dangerous," Charlie muttered as
they ran away from the tree. "How does he know who I am?"
"You're famous," said Fidelio breathlessly
They were now far enough from Mr. Weedon to take a rest. "Getting lost in
that old ruin last term was quite an event. Everyone knows who you are."
Charlie wished it wasn't so.
The sound of a hunting horn rang out across the
grounds, a signal for the end of break.
The temperature was still falling. After supper the
twelve endowed children went, as usual, to the King's room, to do their
homework. It was there that a very nasty argument broke out between two great
friends: Tancred Torsson and Lysander.
Lysander was feeling the cold more than most, but
being a good-humored person his complaints were made in a friendly almost jokey
way What he actually said to Tancred, was, "Tanc, what have you done to
the weather?"
"Not you, too!" Tancred jumped up and
stamped his foot. "I thought that you, of all people, would know
better."
Before Lysander could reply Manfred Bloor spoke up.
"Come on, Tancred! Spare a thought for our friend, here. You're freezing
him to death."
"I'm not!" screeched Tancred, tearing at his
crackling hair.
"He's only joking, Tanc," said Lysander with
a smile.
By this time some of the children were beginning to
feel uncomfortable. Charlie was particularly concerned. Lysander and Tancred
had saved him from the ruin. Together they were a powerful force against the
darker powers that lurked in Bloor's Academy He couldn't bear to see them
quarreling.
"Are you on his side now?" Tancred demanded,
glaring at his old ally
"Everyone's on my side," sniggered Manfred.
Lysander silently shook his head, but unfortunately
Zelda Dobinski chose that moment to show off her particularly nasty gift for
moving things. She was staring at a huge reference book on the shelves behind
Tancred. The book launched itself across the room and caught Tancred in the
back just as he whirled toward the door.
"Owww!" roared Tancred.
Six children burst into wild laughter, while five
looked on in horror.
Tancred didn't notice the sympathetic faces. He was
only aware of the mocking laughter. Wind rushed luriously around the room as
the stormy boy swept through the door, leaving it banging violently against the
wall.
Charlie couldn't stop himself. "Wait!" he
cried, leaping after Tancred.
“And where do you think you're going, Bone?" said
Manfred.
"I've left my pens in the coatroom," lied
Charlie.
A scrawny red-haired boy looked up and sneered, “Always
forgetting things, aren't you, Bone?"
"Not always, Asa." Charlie was scared of Asa
Pike. He was Manfred's sidekick and had a very nasty talent for changing his
shape.
"Close the door," said Asa, as Charlie
stepped outside.
Charlie pulled the door shut behind him. The passage
outside was deserted. Charlie decided to try the hall.
As he descended the wide staircase a blast of arctic
air almost rocked him off his feet. He stepped down into the stone-slated hall
and stood very still. Something was happening to his eyes. He was seeing things
that should not be there. A cloud of sparkling particles swirled in the very
center of the long room. Was it an ice storm?
Gradually the pale fragments grew more vivid. Now they were forming a blurred shape, blue
with a touch ot black beneath it. Before Charlie's astonished gaze, a figure in
a blue hooded cape was materializing.
Charlie had no doubt that he was seeing a ghost. But when the figure turned to face him, he
found, to his horror, that he was looking at. . . himself.
It was the other Charlie who spoke first.
"What a joke," said the boy. "I haven't
traveled very far at all."
He had such a normal sort of voice Charlie was reassured.
This wasn't a ghost. But if not a ghost, what was it? Clearing his throat, he
asked, "Where have you come from, exactly?"
"Here," said the boy "Just now I was
here, but," he shaded his eyes with his hand and gazed up at the row of
electric lights illuminating the hall. "It wasn't like this. How did it
get so bright?"
"Electricity" said Charlie. He was beginning
to recognize the boy “Are you . . . ?" he began. "I mean have you .
. . well, the thing is, I've seen you in a photo. Are you Henry Yewbeam?"
"That's me," said Henry beaming. "I
think I've seen you, too. Somewhere. Who are you?"
"I'm your . . . erm . . . sort of cousin, Charlie
Bone."
"No! This is very good news. A cousin, well,
well." Henry marched over and shook
Charlie's hand. "Very glad to meet you, Charlie Bone."
"The news isn't that good," said Charlie.
"What was the date
when you . . . just now?"
"January 12, 1916," said Henry "I
always know the date."
"I'm afraid it isn't that now"
"No?" Henry's smile began to fade. "So
. . .?"
"You're almost ninety years ahead of where you
were," said Charlie.
Henry's mouth opened but no words came out. Instead
there was a sharp ping as something dropped out of his hand and hit the floor.
Charlie saw a large glass marble rolling across the
hall. "Wow!" he exclaimed, but before he could pick it up, Henry
shouted, "Careful, Charlie. Don't look at it."
"Why?"
"It's what brought me here."
Charlie stood back from the shining glass marble.
"You mean it brought you through time?"
Henry nodded. "It's a Time Twister. My mom told
me about it, but I'd never seen it until just now 1 should have guessed what it
was. I knew Zeke would try and punish me."
"Zeke?"
"My cousin, Ezekiel Bloor." Henry suddenly
grinned. "I say he's probably dead by now." And then a sad and solemn
expression crossed his face. "They're probably all dead: Mother, Father,
even my brother, James. There's no one left."
"There's me," said Charlie, "and I
think your brother is . . ."
At that moment a dreadful howl came from the stairs
above them. The boys looked up to see a squat, ugly-looking dog standing at the
top of the stairs. 11 howled again, raising its long nose toward the roof while
folds of almost hairless skin shook beneath its whiskery chin.
"What an ugly beast," Henry whispered.
"It's Cook's dog, Blessed." Charlie didn't
wait for the dog to howl again. "Quick," he said, grabbing
Henry's arm. "You've got to hide. This isn't a good
place for you to be right now There are people here who might — do something nasty if they find out who you are."
"Why?" asked Henry his eyes widening.
"Just a feeling," said Charlie. "Come
on." He dragged Henry toward the door into the west wing.
"Where are we going?" said Henry scooping up
the Time Twister and slipping it into
his pocket.
For a moment Charlie had no idea why he was taking
Henry into the west wing. He turned the heavy brass ring in the door and pushed his
new friend into the dark
passage beyond.
"I know this place," whispered Henry "I
never liked it."
"Nor me," said Charlie. "But we have to
go this way to find somewhere safe." He closed the door behind him just as
Blessed gave another mournful howl.
The two boys made their way along the passage until they reached an empty circular
room. A dim light hanging from the ceiling showed an ancient wooden door and, opposite the door, a flight of stone steps.
"The tower?" Henry looked at the steps and made a face.
It was then that Charlie realized why he had brought
Henry to this place. "You'll be safe at the top," he said.
"Will I?" Henry looked doubtful.
"Trust me," said Charlie.
As Henry began to mount the steps, Charlie noticed
his peculiar tweed pants. They reached only to the knee, where a button held
them in place over loose gray socks.
Henry's boots looked distinctly feminine: black and
shiny they were neatly laced just above the ankle.
"We'd better find you some new clothes,"
Charlie muttered as they reached a second circular room. A door led off this
room into the west wing, but Charlie urged Henry up a second flight of steps.
"The Bloors live through there," he said.
"Interesting," said Henry "Some things
haven't changed,
then."
They kept climbing upward but long before they reached
the top of the tower, the sound of a piano could be heard, echoing down the
narrow stairwell.
Henry stopped. "There's someone up there."
"It's the piano teacher, Mr. Pilgrim," said
Charlie. "No one else comes up here, and Mr. Pilgrim doesn't really notice
things. He won't be a problem, promise!"
Another two sets of stairs brought them to the small
room at the top of the tower. Sheets of music lay scattered on the floor and the
shelves that ran from floor to ceiling were crammed with huge leather-bound
albums, and thick dog-eared scores.
"It'll be warm here," said Charlie, moving
several piles away from the bookcase. "You see, if we put some paper on the floor like
this," he spread several sheets of music between the bookcase and a wall
of plied scores. "It'll make a sort of bed, and you can hide here till morning."
“And then what?" asked Henry
"Well. . ." Charlie scratched his head.
"Then I'll find a way to get you some breakfast, and maybe some new
clothes."
"What's wrong with my clothes?" Henry gave
an anxious frown.
"They're just different. We don't wear that kind
of stuff now"
Henry glanced at Charlie's long gray trousers and
thick-soled shoes. "No. So I see," he said.
"I'd better be getting back," said Charlie.
"The head boy Manfred Bloor, will be after me, and I don't want to get on
the wrong side of him. He hypnotizes."
"Oh. One of those." Henry had heard about
the hypnotizers in his family "Are you one of them?" he asked
Charlie. "The endowed?"
'"Fraid so," said Charlie. "That's how
I knew you."
"What about him?" Henry pointed to the door
behind which the rich piano music flowed on.
"He won't bother you," said Charlie.
'"Bye, now." He gave a wave and backed out of the small room, feeling
inexplicably guilty
In the King's room a boy with a long, sad face glanced
anxiously at Charlie's empty seat. The boy's name was Gabriel Silk, and he
worried about Charlie. He should have gone after Tancred, not let Charlie go.
Charlie was younger and likely to land in some sort of trouble. He was the kind
of boy unfortunate things happened to.
And then the howling began. At first they all tried to
ignore it, but in the end Manfred flung down his
pen and exclaimed, "Bloody dog! Billy go and shut it up."
"I'll go," Gabriel offered.
"I said Billy," Manfred gave Gabriel one of
his horrible stares and then turned his piercing black gaze on Billy "Go
on," he said. "You can talk to the wretched thing. Ask it if it's got
a bellyache."
"Yes, Manfred." Billy scurried to the door.
As he ran down the chilly stairwells and dark corridors
he talked to himself. He hated it when everyone else was shut away doing
homework. He was afraid of meeting the ghosts. He knew they were there —
gliding about in the dark. Billy never went home. He had no home to go to.
Sometimes, he stayed with an aunt. But not often.
He had reached the wide landing where a grand
staircase led down into the hall. Blessed was sitting at the top of the stairs,
still howling.
Billy sat beside the dog and put one hand on its plump
back. "What's the matter, Blessed?" The words came out in a series of
little grunts and sniffs. A language that Blessed could understand.
The old dog stopped howling. "Boy came," he
said. "Bad thing. Wrong."
"What boy? Why was it wrong?" asked Billy
Blessed considered this question. He seemed to be
having some difficulty with his reply At last he grunted, "Boy came from
nowhere. With ball, very small. Shiny Blessed not like this ball. It bad
magic."
Billy was perplexed. "Was it Tancred?" he
asked. Boy with lots of yellow hair?"
"No. Boy was like that one." Blessed stared
down the hall.
Following the dog's gaze, Billy was surprised to see Charlie Bone quietly closing
the door into the west wing.
"Where've you been?" Billy called.
Charlie looked up, startled. "Nowhere," he
said, lust looking for Tancred."
"Blessed said another boy was here; a boy like
you."
"Blessed's got a vivid imagination." Charlie
began to cross the hall.
"He says there was a ball. It was small and shiny
and he didn't like it."
"I think Blessed was dreaming," said
Charlie, climbing the stairs toward Billy
Billy looked at the old dog. "Blessed doesn't
lie," he said. "Dogs can't."
"They can dream, can't they? Come on, Billy We'd
better get back to our homework or we'll get detention."
"Go back to Cook," Billy told the dog.
"Go on, Blessed. No more howling."
Blessed gave a sullen grunt and began to flop down the
stairs, while Billy and Charlie ran back to the King's room.
When homework was over, Charlie had half a mind to go
and visit Henry He didn't like leaving him alone in the tower, nearly a hundred
years from where he was supposed to be. Of course, he wasn't quite alone, but
Mr. Pilgrim hardly counted. Charlie badly needed to confide in someone.
When he reached the dormitory he found Fidelio filling
his closet with the clothes from his bag. There were two boys from the drama
department in the room and Charlie couldn't risk being overheard. "I want
to ask you something," he whispered to his friend. "Can we go
somewhere else?"
"The art room," Fidelio said softly
As they came out of the dormitory they walked straight
into Billy Raven.
"Be careful what you say" Fidelio whispered
as they sped down the corridor. "I used to feel sorry for Billy,m but I
don't like the way he watches people."
"Someone's got to him," said Charlie.
"I don't know who it is, but they're making him spy for them. I don't think
Billy can help it."
They had reached the art room.
"Light's still on," Charlie commented.
"But no one's here."
"Mr. Boldova might come back," warned Fidelio.
"We'd better hide over there."
A large painting of trees had been propped against two
easels near the wall, and the boys managed to squeeze behind it and squat on
the floor. In a hushed voice, Charlie began to tell his friend about the sudden
appearance of Henry the boy with the Time Twister, who vanished nearly a
hundred years ago. However, as soon as he mentioned the voices in the
photograph, Fidelio clutched his arm.
"Hold on," he said. "D'you mean you can
hear what's going on in photos?"
Charlie nodded. He had never told Fidelio about his
peculiar talent. "I don't like people to know" he muttered.
"I don't think I would, either," said
Fidelio. "Don't worry I won't tell a soul. Go on about Henry Where is he
now?"
"I took him up to the top of the music tower. I
couldn't think of anywhere else."
"What about Mr. Pilgrim?"
"He won't even notice Henry and if he does . .
." Charlie hesitated. "I don't think he'll harm him."
"Hmm. I wonder! You can't tell with Mr.
Pilgrim," murmured Fidelio. "So, what are you going to do with this
long-lost great-great-uncle?"
"1 thought I'd try and smuggle him home at the
weekend. But first I've got to get some food to him."
"Lunch break would be best," said Fidelio.
"He can have my meat — if it's not mince; and you can sneak up to the
tower, while I . . ." He broke off suddenly as a face appeared at the top
of the tree painting.
"What are you doing?" asked Emma Tolly
Charlie was tempted to tell her; she was, after all, a friend, as well as endowed, but
something held him back. "We're just talking," he said. "Can't
get any peace in the
dorm."
"I know," Emma sighed. "I came to
finish a drawing."
"We were just going," said Fidelio.
The two boys wriggled out from behind the painting.
Just as they were leaving the art room, Charlie caught
sight of a large sketch book, lying open on a table. He stared at it, and moved
closer.
"It's mine," said Emma. "Just sketches,
nothing special."
But they were special. Both pages of the open book
were covered with pictures of birds: birds in flight; swooping, hovering,
soaring, and diving. They were so real Charlie felt that if he touched them he
would feel real feathers.
"They're brilliant," he murmured.
"Brilliant," Fidelio repeated.
"Thank you!" Emma gave one of her shy
smiles.
All at once, the door behind them opened, and a voice
said, "What's going on in here?"
Mr. Boldova appeared. You could tell he was an
art-teacher, because his clothes were covered in splashes of paint. Even his
green cape, which he often forgot to wear, had little flecks of color on the
sleeves. Mr. Boldova always looked as if he had just been on vacation. He had
bright hazel eyes, a very healthy complexion, and long brown hair tied in a
ponytail.
"I was showing my work to Charlie and
Fidelio," Emma said confidently "We were just going."
"That's all right, Emma." The art teacher
beamed at them all.
It was impossible to be afraid of Mr. Boldova. He
never gave detention, never punished pupils for untidiness, forgetfulness, or
even being late. The only thing that made him angry was bad art. He gave
Charlie a searching look and said, "Ah, Charlie Bone."
"Yes, sir," said Charlie. "Good night,
sir."
The three children slipped past him and ran for their
dormitories. It was already five minutes to lights out. Matron would be on the
warpath, and Matron was not an understanding person.
She was, in fact, Charlie's great aunt, Lucretia Yewbeam.
As they dashed into their dormitory the boys heard Miss Yewbeam shouting at some poor girl who had lost
her slippers.
"We'll just make it before she gets here,"
said Fidelio, rushing to the bathroom.
Billy Raven was sitting up in bed. "Where've you
been?" he asked Charlie.
"Had some extra work to do," said Charlie.
He pulled on his pajamas and jumped into bed, just as Matron poked her long
face around the door.
"Lights out!" she barked, flicking the light
switch.
Out went the bare bulb hanging in the center of Ihe room.
"That was a close one," murmured Gabriel
Silk from the bed next to Charlie.
Just before Charlie finally drifted off he thought of
the boy in the tower; cold, hungry and probably frightened. What was to be done
with Henry Yewbeam?
Unable to sleep, Henry Yewbeam was staring out across
the city There was a small, round window in the wall between the bookcases and
Henry anxious to know if the world had changed in ninety years, had climbed
onto a stool to find out.
The world had, indeed, changed. The sky above the
horizon seemed to be on fire. It had a terrifying orange glow Could it be the
rows of streetlights leading into the distance? Pinpricks of radiance shone
out from the dark blocks of houses and below the tower pairs of shining lights,
some red, some white, swept across Henry's field of vision, like earthly
shooting stars.
"Motor cars," murmured Henry as one came
closer. "So many"
"So many" said a voice, like an echo.
Henry became aware that a man was standing in the darkness beside him. The piano
music coming from the room next door had stopped. Henry was relieved; he
didn't have much of an ear for music.
"Are you Mr. Pilgrim?" Henry asked.
There was no reply to his question. In the soft light
coming through the window Henry could make out a pale face and very black hair.
The man's expression was solemn and faraway.
"I'm Henry Yewbeam," said Henry
Still no reply
It was like talking to someone who wasn't really there.
Perhaps it wouldn't matter if Henry told him the truth.
"I'm very old," he said. "Or at least I should
be."
In the distance a clock began to strike. The deep chimes
of the cathedral pealed out across the city Mr. Pilgrim turned to Henry His
eyes held a strange glitter.
Henry had just counted the twelfth stroke when Mr.
Pilgrim said, “Are you cold?"
“Yes," said Henry
The piano teacher took off his blue cape and wrapped
it around the boy's shoulders.
"Thank you," said Henry stepping off the
stool.
Mr. Pilgrim smiled. He stretched up to a high shelf
and pulled a tin from a row of books. Lifting the lid he offered the tin to
Henry "Oatcakes," he said. "You see I live up here, practically
And one gets hungry"
"One does," Henry agreed, politely taking
only one oatcake.
Mr. Pilgrim didn't offer him any more. He put the tin
on the stool and said, "Help yourself." The faraway look had come
back into his eyes. He seemed to be trying to remember something. Frowning, he
murmured, "Good night."
And then he was gone, slipping away down some stone
steps with hardly a sound.
Henry would have liked the strange man to stay He was
grateful for the extra cape but, to tell the truth, it was not as cold as it
had been. In fact the temperature was rising rapidly The icicles hanging outside the window
were beginning to melt.
All around the tower there was a steady drip, drip, drip
of ice turning to water. It was a sound that filled Henry with foreboding. He
had just worked out that his sudden twist through time must have had something
to do with the cold. He had arrived in Bloor's when the temperature had reached
exactly the same degree as when he had left, in 1916. A change in the weather
could make a difference in time travel.
"I won't be able to get home," Henry said to
himself. "I'll never see my family again." And
suddenly his
situation
seemed almost too grim to bear. "But I must!" he murmured.
OLIVIA MAKES A MESS
Billy Raven lay wide awake. For two weeks he had slept
alone in the long dormitory. Now he must get used to the grunts and snores, the
heavy breathing and tiny whimpers of other boys. It wasn't easy Billy had
always been a light sleeper.
Tonight he was feeling excited. He had something to
tell old Ezekiel Bloor. Perhaps he would be rewarded. When he was quite sure
the other boys were asleep, Billy swung his feet into his slippers and pulled
on his bathrobe. The floorboards gave only the slightest creak as he crossed
the room and slipped out of the dormitory.
Manfred Bloor had given Billy a present for Christmas;
a long black flashlight with a very powerful beam. Billy hadn't expected a gift
from the head boy of all people, but when Manfred bent down and whispered,
"We must keep our spies happy" Billy had understood.
He switched on the flashlight and a brilliant shaft of
light swept right to the end of the passage. Billy began his long journey to
the upper regions of the west wing. He usually waited for Blessed to lead him.
But tonight he couldn't wait.
As Billy made his way closer to the old man's room, he
had to navigate a gloomy realm that never changed. It was one of the few places
where Ezekiel's flawed magic had worked as he wished. So Billy's slippered
feet made no prints in the thick dust, and the cobwebs he walked through wove
themselves together as soon as he had passed. If it were not for the
occasional hiss from a gaslight, you would have thought the creaking steps and
shadowy passages had been deserted for a hundred years.
Billy had reached a black door, the paint scarred by
years of dog scratchings. He knocked twice and a voice croaked, "Who is
there?"
"Billy Raven," said Billy
"Enter, Billy Raven," said the voice.
Billy walked in.
Ezekiel Bloor sat in his wheelchair beside a blazing
fire. A sheepskin blanket was draped around his shoulders, and his ancient
skull-like face poked from beneath a black woolly hat. A pile of faded velvet
cushions were propped behind his back, and he wore a black velvet jacket
studded with gold buttons. For all his finery though, Billy couldn't help
thinking the old man looked a bit like a dead sheep.
Without being invited, the small boy sat down heavily
in the chair opposite Ezekiel. The sudden change in atmosphere made him feel
dizzy
"Where's the dog?" asked the old man.
"I don't know I couldn't wait for him. I wanted
to tell you something." Billy's glasses had misted up in the steamy
atmosphere. He took them off and rubbed the lenses with his thumb.
“Ah good. Something about Charlie?" The old man
leaned forward eagerly
"Sort of," said Billy
"Come on, then. Tell, tell."
"Well, it was Blessed really He saw it."
"It?" wheezed the old man. "It? What
'it' was this? And the dog's name is Percy How many times do I have to tell
you!"
"Sorry But he thinks he's Blessed."
"Yes, yes. Never mind. Go on!" Ezekiel waved
his hand impatiently
Billy put his glasses back on, and then wished he
hadn't. The old man's wizened face loomed unpleasantly close. Billy could see
every wart and bristle in vivid detail.
"The dog was howling and Manfred sent me to find
out what was wrong, knowing I could understand dog talk, and all that."
"Wish I could understand the wretched dog."
Ezekiel shook his head. "So what did he say?"
"Said he'd seen a boy come from nowhere. And this
boy had a ball, very small and shiny He said it was bad . . ."
"WHAT?" The old man clapped a hand over his
mouth. "What? A boy and . . . and was it glass, this ball?"
"Could be," said Billy amazed by the
excitement his news had caused.
"No, no, it can't be." Ezekiel stood up, but
his useless legs let him down, and he sank back into his cocoon of sheep's
wool and velvet.
"And then I noticed Charlie Bone in the hall, and
Blessed said he looked like the appearing boy" Billy smiled and waited for
the effect these words would have. He wasn't disappointed.
"Charlie Bone," breathed Ezekiel. "Yes,
yes, of course. He was a bit like Charlie Bone. No wonder I can't stand the boy
Find him, Billy Bring him here."
"Who? Charlie?"
"No, you fool. The other one. My cousin
Henry"
"Your cousin?" said Billy confused.
"How? f don't know where he is."
"You've just told me he's in the building. It
can't be that difficult."
"You mean he's your . . . ?"
"My cousin, yes. I sent him packing years ago. Never thought I'd see the wretch again."
The old man's voice dropped to a low mumble. "Must be the weather —
coordinating temperatures. Mm, hmm . . . Time Twister works that way. . . Ho
hum." He drummed his fingers on the arm of his wheelchair.
Billy was intrigued. "What's a Time
Twister?"
Ezekiel looked up. His small black eyes seemed to be
staring right through Billy "It's a marvelous thing," he murmured.
"A crystal ball, hardly bigger than a marble. It can twist you through the
years. No wonder the dog didn't like it. Never look at it, unless you want to
travel, that's what my aunt told me. Ask the dog where that boy is. Percy knows
everything. Now get out and close the door."
Billy was very disappointed. He'd expected to be
rewarded with a cup of hot cocoa at the very least. "Er . . . you know
what you said about my parents he began.
"Parents? You haven't got any" said Ezekiel.
Clearly his mind was on other things.
"No, but you said someone wanted to adopt
me," Billy said hopefully
"Did I? Can't remember We'll see about them when
you've found the boy And don't forget the Twister." Ezekiel dismissed
Billy with a wave of his bony hand.
Billy slipped out of his chair and made for the door.
Then he turned to the old man and said, "Thanks for the boots. My
chilblains are much better."
Ezekiel grunted. He wasn't listening to the boy When
Billy had gone the old man stared into the flames and uttered a stream of
strange words and sounds. Now and again the name "Henry" bubbled to
the surface, and then "Time Twister." Other recognizable words were
"Never!" "How?" "No, no!" "Why?"
"Impossible!" These were spat so hard into the flames they began to
sizzle. The fire might have gone out altogether if the old man hadn't reached
into a silver box beside him and tossed a handful of sparkling sticks into the
grate. But these small magic sticks caused such a violent explosion, clouds of
black smoke billowed out into the room, and the old man was overcome by a
violent fit of coughing.
"Idiots!" he croaked at the innocent silver
box.
Charlie was awake, he couldn't think why Something
must have woken him. What was it?
The distant chimes of the cathedral clock began to ring
out across the city. It was midnight and the back of Charlie's neck began to
tingle. He felt as he always did when he heard the clock strike twelve. Afraid
and elated at the same time.
A bed creaked at the end of the room and he wondered
if Billy had been out and about. Even if he had he wouldn't be punished for it.
Last semester Billy had won the ruin game, and he was now the proud possessor
of a bronze medal, a medal that would give him extra privileges and a whole
year free of detention.
"Billy is that you?" Charlie whispered.
No answer, but there was another long creak, and
Charlie was sure that it came from Billy's bed.
"Where’ve you been?" he asked.
"None of your business," came the reply
It was definitely Billy's voice. Charlie burrowed under
the covers. If Billy wants to
be secretive,
let him,
Charlie
thought. He had other things to worry about: rescuing Henry for one thing. The
whole enterprise needed very careful planning. First of all, he would have to
gel some food to Henry Before he could decide how to do this, Charlie had
fallen asleep.
Fidelio's dreams had been more productive. He had
devised a way for Charlie to sneak up the music tower after lunch. But they would
need help.
Over breakfast next morning, Fidelio outlined his plan
to Charlie. "Olivia will do it," he murmured in Charlie's ear.
Although there was a great deal of noise all around them, Fidelio didn't want
their plans to be overheard.
"Olivia? How can she help?" Charlie said
softly He tried to keep his lips as rigid as possible because Billy Raven,
sitting opposite, was watching him intently.
Fidelio was also aware of Billy's intense stare. He
turned his head away from the table and whispered harshly "She can create
a diversion. We need someone to stop Manfred and Asa Pike reaching the hall,
when you go through the door to the tower. They both use the drama cafeteria;
if Olivia can hold those two up for a few minutes, you stand a chance. No one
else would bother to watch us."
"What are you whispering about?"
Charlie and Fidelio looked up to see Manfred Bloor
leaning over Billy's chair. He was studying them closely It was almost as if
the younger boy had called him over.
"Well, come on, share your secret, Charlie
Bone!" Manfred's black eyes glittered dangerously
Charlie immediately lowered his head. He knew he could
fight Manfred's hypnotizing stare, but he didn't want to get into trouble with
the head boy before Henry had been rescued.
Fidelio said quickly "We were just discussing
Olivia Vertigo's hair."
"Oh?" Manfred raised a thin black eyebrow
"Yes, we thought blue looked very nice on
her," said Charlie, "but we didn't like to say it out loud, in case1
she heard us."
“As if," said Manfred scathingly "It's not
exactly quiet in here, is it? Personally I think Olivia Vertigo's hair looks
ghastly"
He shouted this last remark and, hearing her name
mentioned, Olivia looked over from the tablebehind him. When she saw Charlie's
serious face, she-grimaced and returned to her attack on the lumpy oatmeal.
Manfred drifted away and began to shout at a small
girl who was wearing her cape inside out.
"Phew!" muttered Charlie. "Let's talk
at break."
"Good idea," agreed Fidelio.
By the time the two boys had managed to call Olivia
away from her friends, break was almost over. Olivia came bouncing across the
snowy ground in bright pink lace-up boots studded with sequins.
"The snow's taking all the paint off," she
complained, holding out her left foot. The toe of her boot was a nasty gray
color.
"Olivia, we need a favor," said Charlie,
coming straight to the point.
"Oh?" Olivia put her foot back into the snow
"What sort of favor?"
Charlie knew it was no good trying to get Olivia to do
something without a proper explanation. She would have to know all about Henry
Yewbeam before she agreed to help. So, as quickly as he could, Charlie told her
everything.
Olivia's mouth dropped open and her large gray eyes
grew even wider.
"D'you mean that he got himself sort of whizzed
out of the past to here and now?"
"Yes." Charlie looked over his shoulder. He
thought he saw Billy Raven hovering behind a group of music students. "But
we want to keep it a secret until we know how to help him. I've got to get him
some food."
“And we thought
Charlie could sneak my sausages up the tower at lunch break," said
Fidelio, "if you could keep Manfred and Asa in your cafeteria for a few extra
minutes."
"No problem," said Olivia. "Leave it to
me."
A long blast from the hunting horn sent children
racing in from the field, and Olivia ran off to join her friends.
"We'll just have to trust her," said
Charlie. "She's usually reliable."
Each department had its own cafeteria, and the drama
cafeteria was always the noisiest and most undisciplined. Manfred had done his
best to stop them from wearing fancy shoes and long skirts but the drama
teachers were very lax with the rules. They seldom complained about their
pupils' choice of clothing, in fact they rather encouraged hats with ears,
unusual footwear, and colored facepaint. Mrs. Marlowe, head of the drama
department, considered clothes a means of self-expression, the more unusual the
better. All this infuriated Manfred, but there was little he could do about it,
so he took it out on the children in the music and art departments.
Today the drama cafeteria was a mess. Someone's jacket
was molting and white fur lay all over the floor. Someone else's hat was
shedding feathers and these had floated into the gravy boat. Glitter had stuck
to some of the chairs, and the tables were littered with paint flakes, tinsel,
and bits of false hair.
"It's disgusting," grumbled Manfred, staring
at a sequin in his custard. "Why can't people be more conventional?"
For himself he favored plain black with occasionally a purple shirt to match
his cape. Even the ribbon on his ponytail was black.
Asa Pike gave a nervous snigger. The mustache he was
fond of wearing had just dropped onto his plate. "Oops," he said.
"Forgot I was wearing it."
Manfred shot his companion a look of contempt. "There
are times, Asa, when I would enjoy giving you a good kick."
Asa's yellow eyes took on a nasty gleam. Manfred began
to regret his words. He and Asa were not true friends, they stuck together
because everyone else disliked them. Asa might fawn on Manfred but Manfred knew
quite well that Asa could be as dangerous as he was. Manfred could hypnotize,
but when night fell, Asa could become something wild and deadly a creature
beyond Manfred's power.
So the two boys sat at their table, with tight lips
and brooding eyes, until a sudden commotion by the door broke their
disagreeable silence.
"It's Olivia Vertigo again," said Asa,
looking toward the disturbance.
Manfred stood up. "Not her." He strode over
to the door.
Olivia had managed to tip the entire contents of a
tray right in front of the door. Most of the glass and dishes had broken and
now lay in jagged pieces caked with gravy and custard.
"Sorry sorry sorry" said Olivia. "I
slipped."
"Sony's not good enough," said Manfred.
"Go and get a mop."
"Yes, Manfred." Olivia walked briskly across
the cafeteria and into the kitchen. "I'll give them five minutes,"
she muttered, looking at her watch.
No one paid any attention to Olivia until Cook came
through a door at the back of the kitchen. She marched up to Olivia and said,
"You're on the wrong side of the door, dear!"
"I came for a piece of bread," lied Olivia.
"Didn't you have enough to eat?" asked Cook.
"I was late," said Olivia, glancing at her
watch.
"Tch! Tch! I'll see what I can do." Cook was
about to turn away when the door behind Olivia was suddenly flung open.
Manfred stood glaring at Olivia. "Where's the
mop, you idiot? We can't get out until that mess is cleared up."
"I er . . . ," Olivia began.
"Hold your horses, Manfred Bloor," said Cook
sharply "Everything comes to those who wait." "Ha!" grunted
Manfred.
Cook ambled across the kitchen and took a mop, a
bucket, and a pair of rubber gloves from under the sink. Manfred shouted,
"For goodness' sake, hurry up, woman."
Cook
froze. She dropped the bucket and stared at Manfred with her hands on her hips.
"Don't you speak to me like that. Don't you dare. Don't you ever, ever use that tone with me
again."
"Yeah, yeah!" said Manfred nervously
“Apologize," said Cook.
"Sorry"
mumbled Manfred, pretending to examine his fingernails.
Olivia
could hardly believe it. In a few words Cook had reduced the head boy to a
jittering junior.
Cook picked up the bucket and handed it to Manfred.
"If you want a mess cleared up, do it yourself."
"But I didn't make the mess!" cried Manfred,
turning scarlet.
Cook
shrugged and walked away
Manfred gave Olivia a vicious shove through the door and, as soon as
they were on the other side,
handed her the bucket. J
At that very moment, Charlie and Fidelio were crossing
the hall. Now that the children from drama were all trapped in their cafeteria,
there were fewer people about, and Charlie managed to sneak through the door
into the west wing without being seen. Fidelio stood guard. When Charlie had
completed his mission, he would give two taps on the door, and if the coast was
clear, Fidelio would tap back.
Charlie raced up the deep spiraling steps that led to
the top of the tower. By the time he reached the music room he was out of
breath and had a stitch in his side.
Henry had gone. A large blue cape lay over the back of
a chair, and there was an empty tin on a stool. Some of the books were covered
in crumbs and two candy wrappers had been dropped by the window
Mr. Pilgrim was playing very softly today He kept
repeating the same notes over and over again, as if he couldn't remember where
the music was going.
Without knocking, Charlie opened the door and looked
in. Mr. Pilgrim was alone. He wasn't wearing his cape, and Charlie remembered
that he'd been without it at assembly; but then, Mr. Pilgrim often forgot
things.
The music teacher looked over the piano and frowned at
Charlie.
"Excuse me, sir," said Charlie. "Have
you seen a boy? A boy a bit like me?"
Very much to his surprise, Mr. Pilgrim answered quite
clearly "Yes. There was a boy"
“And do you know where he is now sir?"
"He shouldn't have been up here alone," said
Mr. Pilgrim. "Not at night. It's too cold."
"Yes but — where did he go?"
"He was hungry" Mr. Pilgrim must have
suddenly recalled the notes he'd been searching for, because he played two loud
chords and then launched himself into a very complicated piece of music.
Charlie realized that it would be useless to ask the
teacher any more questions. Besides, if he didn't get back soon, Manfred and
Asa would be prowling around the hall.
"Thank you, sir." Charlie left the room and,
closing the door behind him, ran all the way clown to the bottom of the tower.
He descended the winding stairs so quickly by the time he reached the ground
floor he felt very wobbly on his feet.
Before he went into the dark passage that led to the
hall, he stopped to listen. He could hear nothing. It was safe to enter the passage. All the
same he tiptoed over the stone floor. He had only gone a few meters when he
walked straight into something; a small, thin figure that was hardly a person
at all. It whimpered slightly and scurried away but when Charlie turned to
look back at it, the person or thing turned back, too. Its eyes glittered
behind a thin black veil, and it whispered, "Boy" then it was gone.
INTO THE FREEZER
Charlie tore to the end of the passage and whizzed
through the door at the end, almost knocking Fidelio off his feet.
"You forgot to tap," said Fidelio fiercely
"Someone's watching."
"Who?" Charlie saw Billy Raven disappear
into the coatroom. "Oh no," he groaned. "Not him."
At that moment, Manfred and Asa appeared at the far
end of the hall. Manfred looked furious. As soon as he saw the two boys, he
shouted, "Out! Out! Why aren't you two outside?"
"It's — er — wet," said Charlie.
"Wet? Of course it's wet, you idiot. Not afraid
of a bit of snow are you?"
"We couldn't find our boots," said Fidelio
quickly
"Then, go out in your shoes!" barked
Manfred.
"But. . . ," began Charlie.
"So you'll have wet shoes. So what? That'll teach
you to lose your boots. "Manfred had worked himself into a line temper. His normally
pale face was quite pink.
Charlie and Fidelio scuttled out into the garden
without another word.
"Phew I bet that was all due to Olivia,"
said Fidelio.
"I hope she hasn't got detention," said
Charlie. Henry wasn't there, by the way. Now I don't know what to do."
"We'll find him," said Fidelio confidently
"But we'd better get to him before Manfred. What scared you in the tower? You looked as if you'd
seen a ghost."
"I think I did," said Charlie. "It was
horrible. All black and wispy"
"The dark lady" said Fidelio. "Gabriel
told me about her. She hangs around the music tower. I think she likes Mr.
Pilgrim's piano playing."
A few minutes later, Olivia joined them in the garden.
"Hi, folks, did it work?" she asked.
"It was brilliant," said Charlie. "You
must have held them up for at least ten minutes."
"How did you do it?" asked Fidelio.
Olivia told them about her accident with the tray
"But now I've got detention," she said, "so I won't be going home
till Saturday night."
Charlie's face fell. "I'm sorry I should have
known that would happen."
"Oh, I don't mind," said Olivia. "I can
do a bit of exploring. As long as someone else gets detention with me. I don't
like being on my own."
"Oh." Charlie felt even worse. "Well,
if you don't mind, I think I'm going to be busy"
"Of course. Cousin Henry" Olivia said
cheerfully "I understand. And I know Fido will be doing some musical
thing or other."
"Well, now that you mention it . . . ," said
Fidelio.
"It's OK. Don't look so guilty both of you. I'll
try Emma Tolly." Olivia bounced off in her pink boots, and headed toward
Emma, who was walking around with her nose in a book.
The two boys spent the rest of break walking up and
down on the stones outside the garden door. It was several degrees warmer and
the snow was turning into a watery slush. Charlie's left shoe was leaking.
Just before the horn went for the end of break, Olivia
came up to them looking very fed up. "Guess what?" she said.
"Emma Tolly doesn't like to leave her aunt alone at weekends. I ask you! I
helped to rescue her from those awful foster parents and now she won't even
spend a few hours with me."
"In that case I'll try and get detention,"
said Charlie. "Henry can wait a bit longer."
"No, he can't," said Olivia. "You get
him out of here as soon as you can. It's OK. Bindi's going to stay with
me." She shook her head. "I don't know what's gotten into Emma. She's
so prissy these days."
"She's never had a real home before," said
Charlie. “I suppose she just wants to be
in it as much as she can."
"Hm." Olivia sauntered off.
As the two boys walked to their history lesson,
Fidelio said quietly "Charlie, I think you're going to have to carry out
your rescue mission tonight. You won't get another chance today"
Charlie agreed. But he had no idea where to start
looking for Henry
"Try the kitchens," Fidelio suggested.
"He must be starving by now"
That night, as Charlie lay in bed, he tried to remember
all the stairs and passages that eventually led to the kitchens. He knew there
were three kitchens, one behind each of the three cafeterias. They were
connected by swinging doors, so he would be able to creep through all three,
once he had found his way to the first one.
"D'you think Cook will still be in the kitchen?"
Charlie whispered to Fidelio.
"Not after midnight," Fidelio said softly
"Shut up, all of you!" said Damian cheek.
"Shut up, yourself." Fidelio threw a damp
shoe in Damian's direction. It was a good shot and grazed Damian's cheek.
"I'll get you, Fidelio Gunn, you wait!"
screeched Damian.
"You're on," said Fidelio. "See you by
the garden door, straight after breakfast."
Damian sniveled and pulled the covers over his head.
He was terrified of violence, but he often made silly remarks about getting people,
and then pretended he had hurt his arm or his leg, so he could excuse himself
from a fight.
Charlie was just about to speak, when the door opened
and the light came on.
"Who was talking?" Matron stood on the threshold,
No one
answered.
"Own
up!" she said.
"We
were," said Charlie.
His great aunt swung her long nose in his direction. "Oh? Is that a
confession?"
"We all confess," said Fidelio.
Matron stared around the room unpleasantly "If I
have to come in again, you'll all be put on detention," she said.
"Except me," said Billy
Ignoring Billy Lucretia Yewbeam walked out and slammed
the door.
"That was close," Fidelio whispered so
softly no one but Charlie could hear him. "Do you want me to come with you
tonight?"
"No," Charlie whispered back. "It's better
if just one of us goes. Thanks anyway"
"Good luck!" Fidelio turned over and was
soon asleep.
For a few moments Charlie lay with eyes wide open,
fighting sleep. In desperation, he threw off the covers. Now he was so cold,
sleep was impossible.
He waited until he heard the cathedral clock strike
twelve, and then, with a mixture of fear and excitement, he quickly pulled on
his bathrobe and slippers and crept out of the dormitory
"Right, then left, then down the stairs,"
Charlie murmured to himself. The beam of light from his flashlight was so
feeble he couldn't see much beyond his feet. By the time he'd managed to find
his way down two staircases, he realized he was lost, or certainly in a place
he didn't recognize. Everything looked so different in the dark.
I,iking a chance, Charlie continued for several meters until he came to another set
of steps. He descended two when something bumped into his knees and sent him
crashing to the floor.
"Ow! Ooo! Ouch!" Charlie muttered under his breath.
No bones were broken but he felt bruised and shaken. "Can't go back
now;" he muttered.
Picking himself up he turned a corner and found himself
on the landing above the hall. The lights here were left burning all night and,
with a soft whoop of relief, Charlie ran down the stairs and on into the long passage
that led to the cafeterias.
Stumbling against chairs and tables, Charlie made his way through the blue cafeteria
and into the kitchen. Here, counters
covered in saucepans blocked his way. Machines jutted out at odd angles, mops and
buckets were hidden beside cupboards. A heavy pan crashed to the floor as
Charlie felt his way along a shelf. He froze for a second, and then became
aware of a low light coming from the frosted glass at the top of a door beside
him. Very slowly Charlie opened the door.
He looked into a small room with walls of tall white
fridges and freezers. Henry Yewbeam stood in front of the tallest.
"Henry" breathed Charlie. "What are you
doing?"
"Hello, Charlie," said Henry. "It's
good to see you."
"It's freezing in here," said Charlie whose
teeth had begun to chatter.
"I know" Henry smiled mysteriously
"It's just what I want."
"What are you talking about? Please come out ol
there. I think we could die of cold."
"I don't want to die," said Henry "But I
think I will if I don't get home." He stepped out of the freezing room and
closed the door.
Charlie relaxed. It was warm in the kitchen and he
found it easier to think. He perched himself on a counter and Henry jumped up
beside him.
"I looked for you at lunch break," Charlie
said. "I sneaked some food up to the music room, where were you?"
"There was a lady very small, all in black. She took me to her room. I was a bit frightened of her,
but she gave
me a cup
of tea and some sweets." Henry held out a candy wrapped in silver
paper. "Have one! She gave me a handful."
Charlie took the sweet. It was chocolate with a strwberry
center. One of his favorites. "Yummy" he aid. "I bumped into
that woman. 1 thought she was a ghost."
Henry shook his head. "Not quite a ghost. She used
to play the violin, but now her left hand doesn't work and that makes her very
very sad. You could say she was in mourning for her
fingers."
Henry had an odd way of putting things. Charlie was
intrigued. "Who is she?"
"I didn't like to ask. Mama said it was rude to
pry. The lady told me to go to the
kitchens at night. So here I am. But, Charlie," Henry's face lit up.
"I have found a wonderful thing."
"What?"
"In there," Henry pointed to the cold room,
"a closet that's full of ice."
“A freezer," said Charlie.
“A freezer?" Henry repeated. "Well, I never.
It hums in a very comforting way Charlie, I think it will take me home."
"What d'you mean?" said Charlie anxiously
"I have come to the conclusion that I arrived in
this new century because the weather was right. When I left 1916, it was the
coldest day for many many years. And when I got here, it was exactly the same. But now it's getting
warmer and if I use the Time Twister, I could end up
anywhere."
"You'd be crazy to use it," CharLie agreed.
"Not if I go into the freezer," said Henry
earnestly
"What? You'd freeze to death."
"You could help me, Charlie. Just open the
freezer door, now and again, to make sure I'm breathing. Once I hit the right temperature, I'll be
gone." Henry leaned forward. "Please help me. I want to go home so
much. I want to get back to 1916 and see my family I'll never survive in this
new world. I don't belong."
Charlie had only known his new relation for a day but
already he had begun to like him a lot. He would miss him, he realized.
"It's a bit chancy" he said evasively "I mean you could end up
back in the Ice Age, with mammoths and things."
"I've considered that, but I want to take a
chance. If I think hard about Mama and
Papa, and my brother and sister, I'm sure I'll get back." He grinned
encouragingly at Charlie, "What do you say?"
"OK," said Charlie reluctantly "Let's
give it a go. But if you turn blue, I'm pulling you out of there."
"Thank you, Charlie."
The two boys swung themselves off the counter and went
into the cold room. For a moment Henry stood looking at the tall, white freezer
and then he took the Time Twister out of his pocket. Charlie caught a glimpse of sparkling light in
Henry's hand and he looked away quickly But the light was reflected on the low
ceiling, and through a mist of swirling colors Charlie could make out a city of
dazzling golden domes, and then a range of snow-clad mountains. The snow became
a forest, and the trees turned into the crashing green waves of a mighty sea.
And then a river of glass swept beneath the bluest sky Charlie
had ever seen.
Mesmerized by the amazing world above him, Charlie
felt himself being drawn toward it. When his feet began to slide out from
under him, he tore his gaze away from the ceiling,
but he was too late to see his cousin step into the freezer. Henry had already
disappeared.
Charlie stared at the tall white door. How long should
he wait? He didn't want to ruin Henry's chances, but what if he should
freeze to death before the Time Twister did its work. He closed his eyes and
slowly counted to ten. Then, seizing the freezer door, he pulled.
The door wouldn't open. Charlie pulled again. He put
both hands on the handle, braced himself, and tugged with all his might. The
freezer door was stuck fast. Either it was ice, or some tremendous force inside the
freezer was holding the door shut.
Charlie tried again. He banged on the freezer, he twisted,,
pulled, had a short rest, and then tried again. “Henry! Henry!" he called, pummeling the
door.
“And what d'you think you're doing, Charlie
Bone?"
Charlie whirled around to see Cook standing in the
doorway
"I ... I ... ," Charlie began.
"Cook, there's a boy in the freezer. I don't know if he's dead or ... or gone. You see he might've, but I've got to know . . ."
"Lord save us," cried Cook, almost knocking
Charlie off
his feet
as she charged at the freezer.
With one mighty heave, she pulled open the door.
Henry was crouched at the bottom, under a huge frozen
carcass. His face was blue and his hair and cape were covered in frost.
"Heaven's above!" exclaimed Cook as she
pulled Henry out of the freezer.
He was cold and stiff but Charlie was relieved to hear
him give a small groan as Cook gathered him into her arms.
"Follow me, Charlie Bone," she commanded.
"You'd better tell me what all this is about."
Cook crashed her way through the door, across the
kitchen, and into what started out as a broom closet, but ended up being a
long, softly lit corridor. Even though she was carrying Henry Cook walked so
fast, Charlie found it hard to keep up with her.
At the end of the corridor, several steps led down to
another small closet and this opened into one ol the coziest places Charlie had
ever seen. Bright pictures hung all around the room, from just beneath the very
low ceiling, almost to the floor. The chairs looked old and soft, and a
gleaming ancient dresser had been filled with gold patterned cups and plates.
In a deep alcove there was a large black stove; a kettle boiled on the top,
while bright coals flickered in a window at the bottom. They filled the room with a warm, glowing light.
Cook laid Henry in a large armchair beside the stove
and began to rub his hands. As she did this, Henry's stiff fingers relaxed and
the Time Twister dropped to the floor.
"What's that?" said Cook.
"It's er . . . um ... a Time Twister," said Charlie.
"Huh!" grunted Cook, not at all surprised. "I might have known. It always causes
trouble. Put it in that red mug on the dresser. But don't look at it."
"I won't," said Charlie. He picked up the
shining marble and dropped it into the mug. Vivid colors spun and twisted inside the mug,
and Charlie was tempted to wait and see what sort of picture they would make.
"Don't look, Charlie!" Cook warned again.
"No, no. I won't." Charlie stepped away from
the dresser.
Cook continued to rub Henry's fingers, but he didn't
stir or make a sound. She looked back at Charlie and said, "You stupid boy
You of all people, Charlie Bone. What were you thinking of?"
"I was trying to help," whispered Charlie.
"Help? Help? Murder more like," Cook said
coldly
"No, no, I didn't. . ."
"Who is this boy?"
It took Charlie a few seconds to remember his exact
relationship to Henry Very slowly he said, "He's my great-great uncle
Henry I think. But I just call him cousin. He came from 1916."
“And the Time Twister's responsible, I presume."
"Yes, poor Henry's come a long way I mean he's
come from a long time away"
"I'll say" said Cook. "Get my
bathrobe." She nodded at a large red garment lying over a chair.
Charlie brought it to her.
"Now; take off this poor boy's cape."
Cook gently lifted Henry out of the chair, while
Charlie took off the frost-covered cape. On Cook's instructions he wrapped his
cousin in the big red bathrobe, but still Henry showed no sign of life.
Cook felt the frozen boy's pulse, shook her head, and then put her ear to his heart. "Something,"
she murmured. "Something there."
Charlie felt terrible. He sank into a chair and covered
his face with his hands.
“All's not lost," said Cook. "They're here."
Charlie heard a faint meowing above his head. He looked up to see a skylight of small
green glass panes. Peering through the
glass were three cats with glowing yellow eyes.
"The flames," breathed Charlie.
"Yes, the flames. Look out, Charlie."
Charlie jumped out of the chair as Cook came toward
him. She climbed on the chair and opened the skylight. A blast of cold air and
a shower of snow brought one of the cats sliding down onto the back of the chair. He was a handsome
creature with deep copper-colored fur.
“Aries!" said Charlie.
The cat gave a long, welcoming meow.
"You know these creatures, then?" said Cook,
as an orange cat, and then a yellow followed Aries. They landed either side of
him and greeted Charlie with loud purring voices.
"Leo and Sagittarius," said Charlie.
"Yes, I know the flames. And I think I know what they're going to
do."
The three cats leaped down from the chair and ran over
to Henry Charlie could hear the crackle ol tiny flames as the cats rubbed their
heads against the red bathrobe. They began to circle the chair where Henry's
blue-tinged face rested on a faded cushion. Cook closed the skylight and
stepped off the chair.
"They saved my friend's dog," Charlie told
Cook. “And I think they've saved a lot of people. But I can't understand how
they know when they're needed."
"Sixth sense," said Cook. "Now hush.
Let them do their work."
Charlie sank into a chair opposite Henry. Already he could feel the heat from the cats
as they ran around the frozen boy Soon all Charlie could see was a bright
golden red streak circling Henry's chair.
Charlie yawned. His head drooped and his eyes closed.
In a few minutes he had drifted off to sleep.
When he woke up, Henry still wearing the red bathrobe,
was sitting up and smiling at him. He held a mug of something steamy and sweet
smelling.
"Hello again, Charlie!" said Henry
Charlie blinked and rubbed his eyes. "I'm sorry Henry"
he said. "It didn't work, did it? I tried to get you out but something, I
don't know what, it seemed to be fighting me."
Henry nodded. "I'm going to stay here with
Cook," he said. "No one knows about this room, so I'll be
safe until we can decide what to do next."
Cook was bustling around the stove. She took a hay of
small cakes out of the oven and shook them onto a plate. "Take one of
these," she said, offering the cakes to Charlie, "and then I think
you'd better creep off back to bed."
"Thanks!" Charlie took a cake and bit into
it. It was delicious. "Very good," he said quietly
"It wasn't your fault, Charlie," said Cook,
guessing Charlie's thoughts. "I shouldn't have been so quick to blame you.
You of all people."
"Why d'you keep saying that?" asked Charlie.
"Me of all people. What d'you mean?"
"I'll tell you another time."
Charlie looked up at Cook. For a moment he glimpsed another face behind
Cook's lined, worn features; a face that was young and beautiful. He would have
liked to hold the moment for a long time. He had never felt as warm and
safe as he did now sitting in Cook's wide shadow with the glowing room behind
her, the humming of the stove, and the deep contented purring of the three
cats, as they sipped a bowl of milk before the fire.
"Who are you?" he asked Cook.
"Me?" She smiled. "I'm the lodestone of
the house I keep you all from flying off into the dark."
"But your name?"
“Another time."
"Can I come back tomorrow?" asked Charlie. He wanted to know so much.
"Better not," said Cook. "Wait a while.
Certain persons will be watching you. And not just persons." She nodded at a fat form that had
appeared in the shadows at the back of the room.
Blessed waddled into the light. It was obvious that he
wanted to sit in front of the stove, but the three cats gave warning growls and
the old dog retreated.
"I've seen him before," exclaimed Henry "He's
very old, isn't he?"
"He's a spy" said Cook. "So if you've seen
him, he's already
told
someone about you. Charlie Bone, you'd better go back now Someone might have
noticed your
bed's
empty"
Charlie swallowed the last of his cake and said good night to his cousin. Then he
followed Cook through the labyrinth of closets and passages that led to the hall. Here, Cook took a small
flashlight from her pocket and gave it to Charlie.
"It has a good light," she said. "Off
you go now Am I don't tell anyone about tonight. And I mean 'anyone.'"
"My best friend already knows about Henry"
Cook shook her head. "Can't be helped, I suppose.
But the fewer people know about Henry the better."
"OK. I promise I won't tell anyone where he
is."
Cook watched Charlie cross the hall and begin to mount the stairs. She gave him
a quick wave and walked speedily back to her room.
She was pleased to see that Henry Yewbeam had fallen
into a deep untroubled sleep. Taking the empty mug out of his warm hand, she
replaced it on the dresser.
The three cats had finished their milk and were looking at her expectantly so
she stepped onto
the chair
beneath the skylight and opened it once more.
The flames ran to the chair, jumped up onto the back,
and from there leaped out through the skylight.
"Thank you, my dears," called Cook. She
fastened the skylight and stepped off the chair.
"Now for you," she said to the fat dog that
had moved into his favorite place before the stove.
"I know what you are," Cook said to Blessed,
"but you've been a good boy up to now and kept my room secret even from
your friend Billy Raven."
Blessed looked at Cook and whined softly
"Now, listen. Don't you dare tell that friend of
yours about this boy." She
pointed to Henry asleep in the big armchair.
Blessed stared at Cook with sad brown eyes. Athough she
didn't speak his language, he knew her well enough to understand exactly what
she was saying.
"If you give the game away there'll be no more of
Cook’s chops. No more bed by the stove, or walks in the park. You'll be out on your
ear, for you're of no use to me, you lazy lump of lard. I've mothered you only
out of the goodness of my heart." She wagged a finger at him. Are we clear
about this?"
Blessed grunted and heaved himself into his basket. He
knew when he was well off.
THE BLACK GLOVE
Cook's
flashlight was unusual. Although the beam wasn't very bright, it lit the way
ahead in such a wa\ that Charlie could see details that he'd never noticed
before. In fact some of the things he passed were definitely different.
For instance, there was a row of paintings along the
entire length of a wall beside one of the staircases There was a pair of
man-sized boots outside a door, and a pair of satin shoes outside another. On
one of the landings, a tall plant grew in a blue china pot, and ivy trailed out
of a large brass urn.
"That wasn't there," muttered Charlie.
In spite of these small changes it was easy for
Charlie to find his way back. However, he had only taken a few paces down the
passage to his dormitory when a narrow beam of brilliant light almost blinded
him. Instinctively he turned off Cook's flashlight and waited, hardly daring to
breathe.
The blinding light went out. Whoever stood at the other
end of the passage was waiting to see what Charlie would do. Charlie cautiously
felt his way along the wall. He knew his door was the second on his left. He passed the
first door and stopped, listening intently for footsteps. Hearing nothing, he
made a rush for his door and ran straight into a body.
Charlie gasped. At the
same time the body squeaked, "Ouch! You're standing on my
foot."
"Is that you, Billy?" whispered Charlie.
"What if it is?"
"Don't be silly It was just a question."
Charlie turned on his flashlight.
Billy Raven blinked up at him. He had a large blob of chocolate on his chin.
"Where've you been?" he asked Charlie.
"Where've you been?" said Charlie, lowering
Cook's flashlight.
Billy didn't answer.
"I just popped out to the toilet," said
Charlie. "I can see you've been to see someone who had a bit of chocolate
to spare."
"It's cocoa, actually" said Billy. “And the
toilet isn’t down there, it's the other way"
"I just missed it in the dark," said
Charlie.
Billy
stared at him suspiciously then he pushed past Charlie and went into the
dormitory Charlie followed and crept over to his bed. He heard a soft rustling
as Billy burrowed under the covers and then there was silence.
Charlie wondered who had been giving Billy cocoa in
the middle of the night. Was it a reward for spying? Blessed had seen Henry in
Cook's room and Billy could understand the old dog's language. So
before long the person who was supplying Billy with cocoa would know about
Henry Charlie was too tired to wrestle with the problem anymore Somehow he
would have to find a way to warn Cook.
************************************
The next morning, something extraordinary happened.
and Charlie's worries about Henry were temporarily forgotten.
Breakfast was almost over when a violent gust of wind came
howling down the passage to the dining hall.
The doors flew open and the wind roared into the room, sending cups and plates,
spoons and knives, spinning off the tables. There were shrieks of terror as sharp pieces of cutlery
came zooming through the air. Most of the children pulled their hoods over their heads and ducked under the tables.
Charlie and Fidelio met Olivia crawling behind one of
the benches.
“What's going on?" cried Charlie.
“I reckon it's one of Tancred's storms," shouted
Olivia. "I heard he had a
terrible argument with Lysander last night."
"Tancred? I'd better try and get to him,"
said Charlie.
"Why? What can you do? It's happened before, you
know." Fidelio tugged Charlie's sleeve. "Just leave him to calm
down."
"No. I must see him." Charlie couldn't
explain why he suddenly had an overpowering need to reach Tancred. Tancred had
helped to save him when he was trapped in the ruin and Charlie felt he must at least try to calm him down.
Holding his hood firmly over his head, Charlie crawled
to the open door, and then out into the windy passage. The force of Tancred's
anger was amazing. Charlie guessed a ninety mile an hour gale was blowing
toward him. His nose and mouth were soon full of dust, and the portraits that
had been hanging on the walls kept flying off and whirling into his path.
Occasionally the sharp corner of a frame whacked his head, or caught the hand
that was shielding his face.
Charlie gritted his teeth and kept going. He saw two
figures crawling in front of him. Their capes billowed above them like angry
purple clouds.
Manfred and
Asa, thought Charlie.
The race to reach Tancred was now even more critical. He
was likely
to be
hypnotized if Manfred got to him
first, and not just for
a few
minutes. Tancred might be taken by
surprise. Before he knew it,
he would be lost — put
to sleep,
like Emma
Tolly had been. Her sleep had
lasted for eight years.
As Charlie emerged into the
hall he
could see Manfred and Asa clinging
to pieces
of furniture.
The handle of an oak chest
suddenly came off in Asa's hand,
and he
slid across
the floor
with a
howl of
surprise. Manfred had been more
successful. His arms were wrapped around
the newel
post at
the bottom
of the stairs.
Charlie didn't know how
he could
stop himself
from being blown into
the wall.
Tancred's furious energy filled every
space in the hall. Chairs
were tumbling
about like matchsticks. As he
raised his head, he saw Tancred
standing in front of the
huge doors
leading to the outside world.
His blond
hair was
standing up like a stiff, sparkling
brush. A few meters behind
him, Dr. Bloor, bent
double, was shouting into the wind.
"Tancred Torsson, calm down. Come
away from
those doors. Immediately!"
Tancred took not the slightest
notice. Indeed, Dr. Bloor's voice was
almost drowned by the noise.
All at once, Manfred let
go of
the newel
post and
began to crawl across
the floor
toward Tancred.
Charlie knew it was no
use shouting
a warning.
Tancred would never have
heard him.
Manfred had almost reached the
stormy boy when Tancred wheeled around
and, seeing
Manfred, let loose such a fierce
bolt of
electricity the head boy was sent
sprawling away from him. At
the same
time, the massive doors cracked down
the middle
and, with a loud splintering sound, they flew open.
Tancred turned and marched out,
taking his stormy power with him.
Dr. Bloor rushed to close
the doors,
but they
were so badly cracked it was
impossible to lock them. The
big key Dr. Bloor always carried
with him
clicked uselessly in the lock.
"Bring the chest," he ordered,
waving at Manfred and Asa.
As the two boys pushed
the heavy
chest across the hall, Charlie got to his
feet. The floor was littered
with debris. It was
incredible how much hidden garbage
Tancred's storm had drawn out
of the
shadowy corners in the
hall.
lying at Charlie's feet was
a black
leather glove and, almost without thinking,
he picked
it up
and put
it
in his pocket.
Manfred and Asa gave the
big chest
a final
shove, and it came to rest in
front of the doors.
"That'll do for now," said
Dr. Bloor.
"I'll have to get Weedon to
fix it.
We don't
want anyone
else escaping."
It makes this place sound like a prison, thought Charlie.
Some of the other children
were peering
cautiously into the hall, but
it was
Charlie whom Manfred saw first.
"Charlie Bone, what are you
doing here?" shouted the head boy
"I'm trying to get to
assembly," said Charlie.
Manfred could hardly quarrel with
that. "Get moving then," he said irritably
Fidelio rushed across the hall
and caught
up with Charlie just as he
was going
into the
blue coatroom.
"What about that?" whispered Fidelio.
"It was practically a hurricane."
In all the excitement many
of the
children behind them had forgotten the
rule of
silence.
They were immediately given detention
and then
dispatched to the kitchen
to fetch
brooms and dustpans.
"Olivia won't be lonely on
Saturday" said Fidelio. "I heard at least six people
get detention."
Charlie sat on one of
the benches
and began
to pick off the bits of
dust and
garbage that clung to his cloak.
A great
weariness stole over him, and
he slumped back against the wall.
"What's up, Charlie?" said Fidelio.
"You look done in."
“I wish Tancred hadn't gone,"
Charlie murmured. “We’ve got to
get him
back."
“Why?"
“I can't explain. He helped
me once,
and now
he's gone.
Suppose he's expelled?"
"He won't be," said Fidelio
confidently "The endowed are never
expelled. Sooner or later he'll
calm down and come back."
"I hope it's sooner," muttered Charlie. He wasn't
mistaken. Without Tancred there
was something
definitely amiss.
That night Charlie was the
first to reach the King's
room with his homework.
Gabriel came in a few
seconds later. He looked ill
at ease.
Carefully placing his books beside Charlie's,
he said,
"Something's wrong."
"It's Tancred, isn't it?" said
Charlie. "I feel sort of
unbalanced."
"Me, too," said Gabriel.
"We've got to get him
back. Will you come with me
over the
weekend, Charlie?"
"To Tancred's house?"
Gabriel nodded. "It's not far
from where
I live.
But it's a pretty stormy place.
They call
it Thunder
House.”
"Does anyone else in his
family have an — er
— weather talent?" asked Charlie.
"I'll say His dad's really
turbulent."
"Oh." Charlie wasn't sure if
he was
looking forward to this mission.
"Where on earth is everyone
else?" muttered Gabriel. "They're
ten minutes
late. Manfred's nearly always here
first."
Lysander walked into the
King's room clutching a pile of
sketches. His usually cheerful face
looked troubled and confused. "I
thought I was late," he said "Where's everyone else?"
Charlie
shrugged. "They've all disappeared — like Tancred." He immediately
regretted his words because Lysander looked even more depressed.
"What went on between you
two?" Gabriel asked Lysander.
"It was a misunderstanding," muttered Lysander.
"Manfred's fault. He asked
if Tancred
had made
it warmer just for me. Tancred
shouted that it was nothing
to do with him, and I
said, 'Don't get upset, Tanc,
I’m really grateful.'"
"But Tancred doesn't do temperature,
right?" said Gabriel.
"Too right." Lysander slumped in
his chair.
“And he's so touchy about things
like that,
he hit
the roof. I forgot, you see. He's my
best friend
and I
forgot. You know I think Manfred made
me forget.
He didn't
exactly hypnotize me, but
he was
staring at me in a funny
way I
was sort
of disabled."
"We're going up to the
Thunder House on Saturday," said Gabriel. "Come with
us. He's
more likely
to listen to you."
"Don't know about that," said Lysander glumly "But
sure, I'll come."
The three boys sat in
gloomy silence for a while, and
then, because there didn't seem
anything better to do, Charlie brought
the black
glove out of his pocket. He laid it on
the table
saying, "I found this in the
hall, when Tancred had gone."
"It's not Tanc's," said Lysander.
"Probably some old thing that's been
lying under a closet for
years."
The glove was
made of
very soft
leather. The fingers were long
and narrow
and there
was an
opening at the wrist, with four
small leather buttons on one side, and four neat holes
on the
other.
Gabriel frowned at the glove.
He stretched
out his
hand. Charlie found himself
crying, "Don't, Gabriel!"
But it was
too late.
Gabriel had pulled the glove
on to his left hand. His
face suddenly
creased with pain and he let
out a
terrible moan.
Charlie reached out to pull
off the
glove, but Gabriel fell forward, his head
crashing onto the table.
"He's fainted," cried Lysander. "What's
going on?"
"It's the glove. You know Gabriel's
gift. He can feel what happened to the people
who wore
things before him."
"The owner of that glove must've
been hurt
pretty badly," said Lysander.
He touched
Gabriel's head. "He's gone cold."
"Gabriel! Gabriel, wake up!" cried
Charlie. He tried to pull the
glove off Gabriel's hand but
it was
stuck fast.
Gabriel turned his head. "My
hand! Oooo, my hand," he groaned.
"Il's the glove," Charlie told
him. "I
can't get it off you."
"Oooow!" Gabriel sat up and
began to tear at the glove with his right hand. "My
fingers are broken. Help! Help, someone!"
Charlie tugged the fingers of
the glove
while Lysander tried to peel it
away from
Gabriel's wrist. It was no use. Gabriel was now
panting heavily. Between small grunts of pain, he
said, "She put her fingers
on the door and he slammed it."
"Who?" asked Charlie. "Who slammed
it?"
"A woman, I think. Yes,
a woman.
She was
trying to get out, and she was shaking
her head
like she
wouldn't do what they
wanted." Gabriel gave another moan. "But the boy 1 think
it was
Manfred, he slammed the door and
pushed and pushed until he crushed
her fingers.
Oooow. Oooh! Manfred it is
but he's smaller. Ooow!" Gabriel's head
fell forward
again.
At that moment there was
a tap
on the
door and
Olivia looked in. "There
you are,"
she said.
"Fidelio sent me to look for
you. He
couldn't get away because he's
in the front row"
"Front row?" said Charlie.
"Don't tell me you all
forgot," said Olivia. "There's a concert in the theater
tonight. What's wrong with Gabriel?"
"He's not well," said Lysander.
"I can see that, but
you'd better get him to
the theater
quickly if you don't want
detention."
"Gabriel, can you walk?" Lysander asked gently
Gabriel moaned. "If I have
to."
"Come on, then. Charlie, help
me!"
Lysander pulled the stricken boy
upright, and putting Gabriel's arm
around his shoulders, clutched him
by the waist. Charlie did the
same. He got the arm
with the glove on
it, and
it worried
him to
see how
limp and crushed Gabriel's
left hand
looked.
"I'd better go ahead and
make sure
there are three seats in the
back for
you." Olivia rushed off.
By the time the three
boys had
staggered into the dark theater, the
concert had begun.
"You'll have to manage on
your own
for a
bit," Lysander whispered to
Gabriel.
"Uh!" Gabriel grunted.
Olivia had been as good
as her
word and
there were three empty seats waiting
for them
at the
back of the auditorium. Charlie pulled
the sleeve
of Gabriel's cape over the black
glove, and helped Lysander maneuver him
into a
seat.
Unfortunately Dr. Saltweather saw the
boys come
in late. He frowned
at them
and shook
his head,
then turned his attention back to
the stage.
Dr. Bloor
was making a speech about music,
and it
soon became
clear that he was
describing the life and work
of the
other man on the
stage: Mr. Albert Tuccini.
Behind Dr. Bloor a man
with a
deep tan
sat at
a grand piano. He had brown
curly hair and a rather
morose expression. His arms
were folded
across his chest and he occasionally
glanced at the red velvet
curtains at the back
of the
stage.
Dr. Bloor came
to the
end of
his speech.
The audience
clapped enthusiastically Albert Tuccini swiveled
around to face the
piano and his long fingers
pounced on the keys.
Gabriel was a pianist himself
and he
listened intently to the complicated
chords that Albert Tuccini rung out of the piano.
Gradually his hard breathing eased, he forgot the pain
in his
fingers and managed to enjoy the
music.
The pianist's second piece seemed
familiar to Charlie. But he couldn't
remember where he had heard it
before. A memory was buried
at the
back of
his mind. Far, far
back. Could it have been
the music
his father played? He
began to nod off. And
then he
was asleep and dreaming.
He dreamed
of a
room Grandma Bone had described to
him. A
white room, with pale curtains at
the long
windows. A room empty of everything
except Lyell, his father, and
a grand
piano. But he couldn't
see his
father's face. He didn't even know what he looked
like. Grandma Bone had hidden or
destroyed every photo of her
only son.
“Charlie, wake up!" Gabriel was
nudging his arm.
Charlie opened his eyes. The
lights were on in the
auditorium and children were
moving up the aisles toward the exit doors. The
stage was empty
"How long have you been
asleep?" asked Gabriel.
"Don't know," Charlie murmured. "Most
of the
time, 1 think." He dragged himself
out of
his seat.
Lysander left the theater with
them, but then he had to
get to
his own
dormitory "Are you going to
be OK?" he asked Gabriel
before he parted from them
on the landing.
"I'll live," said Gabriel, grinning.
"We'll have another try at
getting that glove off," said Charlie, who was feeling
more awake.
In the dormitory Charlie told
Fidelio what had happened and they
spent several minutes trying to tug
the glove
off Gabriel's
hand. It was impossible, Gabriel went to the bathroom
and tried
soap and
water but the glove clung
even tighter.
He came
back and
sat on the edge of his
bed. "Poor
woman," he murmured. "She must
have broken
all her
fingers."
"Do you know who she
was?" asked Charlie.
"Is," said Gabriel. "She's still here. I've seen
her. It's
the dark lady from
the tower.
I used
to think
she was a ghost, but she
isn't. She's just sort of
useless and alone."
Billy Raven had crept up
behind them. He stared at
the black glove on
Gabriel's hand. "What's that?" he asked.
"What does it look like?"
said Fidelio.
“A glove. Why are you
wearing one glove, Gabriel?'
Gabriel sighed. "Because I can't
get it
off that's
why"
Billy frowned. He didn't ask
any more
questions, but wandered back to his
bed with
a thoughtful
expression.
Charlie and Fidelio made one
more attempt
to pry
the glove off Gabriel's
hand, but the water had
made it cling like a second
skin.
"It's no use, guys," sighed Gabriel. "I'll just
have to sleep with it on.
Maybe it'll come off when
it's dried
out.” He yawned. "I'm so tired,
nothing will keep me awake tonight."
Gabriel was right. He fell
asleep almost as soon as he got into bed. But while
he slept
his dreams
became nightmares, and he
moaned with pain as he
tossed and turned in his bed.
Gabriel made so much noise
Charlie couldn't sleep a wink. The
other boys woke up, too.
Damian.
Smerk threw his pillow at the
moaning boy but it didn't wake
him. He
was buried
deep in
his troubled
sleep.
The next night, Charlie and
Fidelio tried, once again, to pull
off the
clinging black glove, but now
it had shrunk. It wouldn't even
peel away
at the
wrist.
Gabriel's hand hung uselessly
at his
side. He couldn't even feel his
fingers, he said.
They didn't know what to
do. Telling
Matron was out of the question. Charlie had
an idea.
After lights out he leaned close to Gabriel's
bed and
whispered, "I know someone who can
help."
"Who?"
"Someone who lives behind the
kitchens. We’ll have to wait till after
midnight, though."
"Wake me up when it's
time to
go," said Gabriel.
"OK."
Charlie
had promised
Cook that
he wouldn't
tell anyone where Henry was hiding.
But that
wasn't quite the same as taking
someone to her secret room.
Be sides, this was an emergency
"YOU CAN'T GO BACK!"
At five
minutes past midnight, Billy Raven
Left the
dormitory Charlie wondered if
he could
get Gabriel
down to Cook's room and back
before Billy returned.
"Gabriel," he whispered, shaking Gabriel's
shoulder. "Wake up! It's time to
go!"
Gabriel dragged himself out of
bed and
fumbled with his pajamas. "Ready!" he murmured.
Charlie grabbed his arm and
led him
out of
the dormitory Only then did he
turn on
Cook's flashlight. Its soft light
illuminated every tiny detail of
the long
corridor.
"Wow;" said Gabriel. "That's impressive."
"Follow me," Charlie whispered.
He began to jog, as
quietly as he could, while
behind him Gabriel floundered and
tripped in his badly fitting slippers.
By the time Charlie had
found his way to Cook's
closet entrance, Gabriel looked
exhausted. The fingers on his left
hand had
begun to throb again, and
the pain made him ache all
over.
Charlie
didn't like to burst in
on Cook
unannounced, so he knocked politely
on the
closet door.
There
was a
shuffling noise behind the door
and then it was opened, just
a crack.
"Shoot me," said Cook,
peering out at Charlie. "What are you doing here?"
"I'm sorry Cook," said Charlie. "But
. .
."
Behind
him, Gabriel
gave a
low moan.
Cook
opened the door a little
wider. She was wearing her red
bathrobe. "Shivering cats,"
she said.
"Who on earth is
this?"
"Gabriel Silk," Charlie told
her. "He's
had a
sort of
accident with a glove."
"Tch! Tch! You'd better come in."
Charlie
led his
friend through the closet and
Gabriel looked around Cook's
secret room in amazement. "What
a lovely
place," he said.
Cook
made him
sit down
and examined
his gloved hand, while Charlie told
her how
he'd found
the glove, and how
poor Gabriel
had an
unfortunate talent for experiencing
other people's feelings, when he wore their clothes.
"Hm," muttered Cook. "That's Dorothy's glove."
"Dorothy's?" said Charlie.
"It's the dark lady's," said Gabriel. "She haunts
the music tower. I've seen her.
She had
her fingers
broken in a door."
Cook nodded. "That's what you
call her,
do you?
the dark lady Well,
I'll have
you know
that the
dark lady is Mrs. Bloor."
"What? Manfred's mother?" said Charlie.
"I thought she was — well,
dead."
"So do most people," said Cook. "Poor thing.
She lives a terrible half-life. When
Manfred crushed her fingers, she gave
up. Faded
away so
to speak.
She comes down to my little
room, now and again, and
we talk. But she's a sad,
sad creature."
"Too right she is," said
Gabriel. "This glove makes me feel so miserable I could
do myself
in."
"Now then, we'll have none
of that talk," Cook said sternly "We'll have that glove
off you
in no
time. Mind you, the only person
who can
do it
is the
owner of the glove."
"Why's that?" asked Charlie.
"It's just the way it
is. Musician's
hands are very special. There's a
lot of
feeling in that glove, and
I can
see that it's really
made itself
at home
on your
skin, Gabriel."
"I'd rather not lose any
skin, if you don't mind,"
said Gabriel. "I'm a
bit squeamish."
"Endowed children were a lot
more stoical
in my
day," Cook remarked as
she ambled
across the room. "I'll fetch Dorothy."
She opened
the door
of a
small corner closet and the boys
caught sight of a narrow
stairway before Cook squeezed
herself into the closet and closed
the door.
They heard the soft tap
of footsteps
behind the wall, and then over
their heads. For a plump
person Cook was surprisingly light-footed.
"What a place," Gabriel murmured,
gazing around at the bright pictures
and gleaming
antique furniture. “You'd never guess that all this
was right
under that gloomy old building."
"Never," agreed Charlie. "Mind you,
I think
part of
it must be under the city You
can see
the sky
through that window." He nodded at the
small window in the ceiling.
Gabriel turned to look at
the skylight.
"So what's up there?" he said.
Charlie shrugged. "Who knows? Someone's
garden. A road." He was
wondering what had happened to Henry Had Cook sent
him back
through time? Had he run away?
Soft footfalls overhead told them
that Cook
was returning with someone who walked
with a
peculiar shuffling sound.
A few moments later, the
door to
the closet
opened, and Cook came
in, followed
by a
small woman in a long, shapeless,
black dress. A dark shawl
covered her head so
her face
could hardly be seen; she walked
with her
head bent
as though
she were
searching the ground.
"Now Dorothy you sit here,
dear!" Cook pushed a chair close to Gabriel's. "This
is Gabriel,
and he
seems to have gotten himself stuck
into your
glove."
Dorothy looked at Gabriel's limp
hand, and then she stared at
Charlie. Her shawl fell to
her shoulders,
revealing long gray hair
and a
pale face
with two
gray eyes in deep dark sockets.”
And who is this?" she asked
in a tiny voice.
"I'm Charlie Bone," said Charlie.
"Pleased to meet you, Mrs. Bloor."
"Oh?" said the faint little
voice. "So you're Charlie. I know ... I knew .
. ."
Mrs. Bloor appeared to have
forgotten what she knew or had
known, for she turned her
attention back to Gabriel and said,
"Poor boy You play the
piano, don't you? I like
to listen.
I'll do
my best
for you,
but I can only use one
of my
hands. The other has been cursed,
you see."
The boys gasped in horror
"Who cursed you?" breathed Charlie.
Mrs. Bloor just shook her
head. With her right hand she
began to peel the leather
glove away from Gabriel's wrist. It
took a
long time,
and after
a while,
in a light trembling voice, Mrs. Bloor
began to tell them her story
Dorothy de Vere had been
a very
talented violinist. Soon after she inherited a large
fortune from her aunt, Dr. Harold Bloor had courted
her. They
were married within a year and Dorothy
gave him
half her
fortune. And then her
troubles began. Her son, Manfred,
hated all forms of
music. He screamed when she picked
up her
violin. She only dared play
in a
room where no one could hear
her. Old
Ezekiel Bloor demanded that she
hand over
the rest
of her
fortune.
She refused. On her
father's advice she had put
it in
a secret bank account in Switzerland.
Nothing would make her hand it
over. She was deeply unhappy
in the
gloomy academy and planned
to leave
it.
"They did terrible things to
people," she murmured, "and I
couldn't stand it. One day
one wild,
stormy day . .
." Her voice grew so
faint they couldn't hear it, and
then she
stopped altogether, and it was Cook
who told
them what
had happened.
There was a violent thunderstorm and hoping the noise
would cover the sound
of her
departure, Dorothy had packed her bag.
"She had been about to leave
her room,
when Manfred looked in. “You can't
go,' he
had snarled.
'We won't let you. Not
until you've signed over the
money.'
"Once again, Dorothy had refused.
Manfred said he'd lock her in
her room.
Dorothy put her hand on
the doorframe to stop
him, and
he slammed
the door — crack — on
her fingers."
Mrs. Bloor's head drooped. She
shuddered. "Tell them, tell them," she murmured. "Tell Charlie
Bone."
"She fainted, poor thing," Cook went on. "When
she came to, she
was on
her bed.
Old Ezekiel
was sitting
beside her. He'd soaked her
injured fingers in one of his
vile potions.
He told
her she'd
never play her violin again. Never
leave here. As far as
they were
concerned, she didn't exist,
so she
might as well give them the
money."
"But I didn't," whispered Dorothy
"I never will." She had peeled
the glove
back, so that Gabriel's fingers
could now be seen.
With a
light tug, she pulled it
right off.
"Phew!" said Gabriel, shaking his
hand. "It feels OK. It really does. Thanks!"
"I'm glad, so glad," murmured Mrs. Bloor.
Charlie was relieved but anxious
to get
back to
the dormitory before Billy "I think
we'd better
go now;"
he said. "But, Cook, where's —
you know
who?"
"Fast asleep," said Cook.
Charlie looked around the room.
There was no sign of a
bed.
Cook laughed. "I have other
rooms," she said, "and I’ve got a very nice
bathroom and toilet, but I'm
not showing you around tonight. Off
you go,
both of
you."
"But I'll be going home
tomorrow;" said Charlie.
“How am I going to get
Henry out?"
"I'm afraid there won't be
a chance,"
said Cook.
“And perhaps it's better that
those Yewbeam sisters don't see him.
We'll have to have a
good long
think about Henry's future."
She seemed to know a
lot about
Charlie's family
Charlie and Gabriel said good
night to the two women and,
before they left, Gabriel did
something rather surprising. He seized Mrs. Bloor's
injured hand and kissed it. Mrs.
Bloor smiled for the first
time that
night. It changed her
face completely
Charlie turned away in embarrassment.
Gabriel really was a most peculiar
person. "By the way" he
said to Cook, "the flashlight you
gave me
— it's
magic or something, isn't it? It
showed me things I've never
seen before."
"That was you, Charlie, as
well as
the flashlight.
And there'll be more."
As the boys made their
way back
to the
dormitory, Gabriel asked, "Who
is this
mysterious Henry?"
In a deep whisper, Charlie
told the
amazed Gabriel about Henry and the
Time Twister.
He knew
he could
trust him.
They reached the dormitory without
any mishaps
and, luckily just a
few minutes
before Billy Raven came back from
his midnight
ramble.
In the morning Gabriel handed Charlie
a slip
of paper. "It's my address," he said. "Don't forget we're going to the Thunder House to
see Tancred."
Charlie showed the paper to
Fidelio. "D'you want to come?" he asked.
"Hail Road, The Heights," said Fidelio, reading the
address. "How are we
going to get there?"
"I'll think of something," said Charlie.
He spent the rest of
the day
trying to get a message
to his
cousin before the weekend. Twice
Manfred found him hovering outside the
cafeterias. The second time he threatened Charlie with
detention, and though Charlie was tempted
to chance
it, he
knew Tancred's problem was more urgent.
The stormy
boy's absence was having
a strange
effect, especially in the King's room. In the
King's room the empty seat next
to Lysander
was like
a cold,
airless hole. It stole their energy
and made
some of
the endowed
children shiver. They lost
their appetites and couldn't think straight. This happened to
Charlie, Lysander, and Gabriel. Even Emma
complained that she felt ill.
Manfred, Asa, and Zelda, and
even Billy
Raven sailed through their homework and
bounced their way to meals and
lessons with energy and enthusiasm.
Something had to be done.
At the end of the
day as
everyone trooped out through the main
doors, Charlie caught sight of
Olivia and Bindi on the stairs.
He gave
them a
guilty wave, but Olivia was looking
very excited.
He hoped
she wouldn't do anything too dangerous.
The blue bus dropped Charlie
off at
the top
of Filbert
Street and, as he made
his way
to number
nine, Benjamin and Runner Bean came
rushing up to greet him.
"It's been such a boring
week," sighed Benjamin "What
did you
do?"
As they walked home together,
Charlie told Benjamin everything that had
happened.
"You lead a very interesting
life, Charlie," Benjamin commented,
"but I think I'd rather
be me."
"I don't have a choice,"
said Charlie.
"I've just got to do the best
I can
to survive
it all."
The front door opened before
he'd had
time to
ring the bell, and Maisie pulled
him inside
with a
violent tug. "Tea's ready" she said,
dragging him toward the kitchen, "all your favorites. Yours,
too, Benjamin. Come along. And I've got a
nice bone
for Runner
Bean."
The boys had just sat
down to
enjoy Maisie's wonderful
spread when Grandma Bone walked
in.
You could tell right away
that she
was going
to spoil
Charlie's appetite.
"What's this?" she said, slamming
the photo
of Henry beside Charlie's plate.
“An old photo," said Charlie.
Grandma Bone had evidently been snooping
in Uncle
Paton's room.
“And what happened to it?"
she demanded.
"It fell off the wall
when you
slammed the door."
That was the wrong thing
to have
said to
his grandmother.
"I slammed the door? Me?
You broke
the glass,
Charlie Bone, and you
didn't confess."
"He brought it straight in
here," said Maisie hotly. “And it wasn't his fault."
"It was my frame, my
glass," said Grandma Bone. "I should have been told.
But let
that pass.
It's this
boy I'm interested in." She planted
a bony
finger on Henry's face. "You've seen him,
haven't you?"
"Of course I haven't," said Charlie. "That photo's
ancient. He must be
a hundred
years old."
Benjamin was digging into a
plate of ham sandwiches. He kept his head
well down,
not daring
to look at Charlie.
"I have it on good
authority that Henry Yewbeam is
about again," Grandma Bone
said in
a chilly
voice, "and that you have seen him."
So the dog
has told Billy, thought Charlie. And Billy has
passed on the news,
to Grandma's
sister, Matron Yewbeam, or to
Manfred.
“You're being silly Grizelda," said Maisie. "Charlie's been locked away in that
horrible old academy all week. How
could he have seen the
fellow unless he was a ghost, of
course."
"Keep your nose out of
this!" barked Grandma Bone.
"And you keep your nose
out of
Charlie's tea," Maisie shouted,
rolling up her sleeves.
Arguments at number nine nearly
always started this way The pattern was familiar
to Charlie.
He just
wished it hadn't happened
quite so soon after he'd
come home. He followed Benjamin's example
and grabbed a sandwich. Benjamin grinned
at Charlie
across the table, and
Charlie grimaced back. They managed to get quite a lot
of food
inside themselves while the grandmas insulted
each other
over their
heads. Runner Bean added
to the
noise with long anxious howls. He hated arguments.
When the shouting match was
over, Grandma Bone, shaking with fury
said, "Don't think I'm going
to let this matter rest." She marched out of
the kitchen,
slamming the door behind
her.
"Well," said Maisie. "That was
fun, wasn't
it?"
"I wouldn't say it was
fun exactly"
said Charlie.
"I've had a rather tiring week."
"Grandma Bone is going crazy"
grumbled Maisie. "As if you'd seen
a boy
who must
be a
hundred years old."
"Not quite a hundred," Charlie said without thinking.
"Oh?" The truth dawned on
Maisie. "I see. You've had peculiar
things happening to you, have
you?"
"It happened to Henry not
me," said Charlie, reaching for
a slice
of cake.
"This is a great meal,
Mrs. Jones,"
Benjamin said quickly
"It's all right," said Maisie.
"My lips are sealed, certainly
where your other grandma is
concerned."
The two boys managed to
finish their tea in peace,
and then went up
to Charlie's
room. Runner Bean came bounding after
them. Grandma Bone had been
so angry she'd forgotten
to remind
Charlie that dogs weren't allowed in
bedrooms.
When Benjamin had helped Charlie
unpack his bag, the boys sat on
the bed
while Runner squeezed in behind
them. Charlie told Benjamin of
the plan
to visit the Thunder House. He wondered
if Benjamin's
mom
would
take them
up there.
Benjamin shook his head. "Mom's
working on an important case at
the moment.
A really
gruesome murder. She'll be
out till
late on
Saturday So will Dad."
Benjamin's parents were private detectives.
They worked very odd hours and
Benjamin often had to cook his
own meals.
"I thought your mom promised
to stay
home a
bit more often," said Charlie.
"She has," said Benjamin. "She's
been at
home all
week, but then yesterday
this case
came up
and it
was so interesting, she just couldn't
refuse it."
"Hm. I'll have to think
of someone
else then,"
said Charlie. "There's always Uncle Paton."
"But he wouldn't take us
till it
was dark,
would he?" said Benjamin.
"I don't like going up
to the
Heights in the dark.
Especially to a place where
you might get struck by lightning
or something."
Charlie
had to
agree. Still it was worth
a chance.
When Benjamin had gone home,
Charlie knocked on his uncle's door.
There
was no
answer. Charlie wondered if his
uncle had gone out.
It was
now very
dark. At that moment, his mother
came in
and Charlie
ran down
to greet her. She'd
brought a bag of moldy
eggplants home with her.
Maisie
was very
pleased. "They're only half moldy,”
she said, spreading the
eggplants across the kitchen table. "We'll make a nice
ratathingy."
Charlie hoped she didn't mean
anything with rats in it. With
Maisie anything was possible. He
decided he'd rather not know "Have
you seen
Uncle Paton lately?" he asked.
"Very little," said his mom.
"Poor Uncle Paton. He was
getting very fond of Julia
Ingledew; and now she has no
time for
him at
all. She
spends the whole week preparing for Emma to come
home, and then devotes her entire weekend to the girl.
They visit
museums and castles and talk a
great deal about books, apparently. She's shut poor Paton out
altogether."
"That's tough," said Charlie. "So
he's in
right now.”
Charlie went upstairs and tapped
on his
uncle's door again.
"What?" said an angry voice.
Charlie opened the door and
looked in. The mess in his uncle's room was even
worse than usual. There was also a very bad
smell. Perhaps Paton had hidden
a few unfinished meals under
his bed.
"Can I talk to you?"
asked Charlie meekly
"If you must," murmured Paton.
He was
studying a book and didn't look
up.
When he'd managed to reach
Paton's desk without knocking anything over,
Charlie said, "I've met that
boy. The one in
the photo.
Your dad's
brother."
"What?" Paton's head shot up.
"Tell me more."
Charlie told him about the
Time Twister
and Henry's strange arrival. When he
began to describe his part in
the freezer
experiment, however, Paton roared, "You did what?"
"He wanted to go back,"
said Charlie,
"and I had to help him."
"You stupid, stupid boy" thundered
his uncle.
"People can't go back. You
can't change history Think about it! When my father
was five
years old, he lost his brother.
It changed
his life.
He became
an only
child, grew up as
an only
child. All his memories are
of being an only
one. You
can't change that now can
you?"
"No," Charlie said quickly "I'm
sorry"
His uncle hadn't finished. "Henry's
parents mourned him, just
as they
mourned poor little Daphne. James was
their only child and, as
a result,
he was probably spoiled. His father
died and
his mother left everything to him,
including her lovely cottage by the
sea. You
can't change that, can you?"
Charlie sighed. "No," he said.
And then
he had
an idea. "Would your father like
to see
Henry again?"
Paton's angry expression gradually changed.
Charlie could almost see
thoughts chasing each other across his uncle's face.
"Now there's a thought," said Paton as if
he'd suddenly
found the right one.
"So what d'you think?" asked Charlie.
"I don't think anything yet," said
Paton. "You'll have to leave me to ponder."
Charlie judged that now would
be the
right time to ask his uncle
a favor.
But when
he mentioned
going up to the Heights to
visit the Thunder House, he
didn't get the answer he'd hoped
for.
"Ha!" said Paton. "I'm not
going anywhere near those storm people.
It's useless
to meddle
with them
when they're in a
mood. I strongly advise you
not to
try."
Charlie began to explain how
urgent it was to get Tancred
back to
the academy
but his
uncle wouldn't listen. It was obviously
going to take Paton a
long time
to become the brave
and helpful
uncle that he had once been.
"We've got to get there
somehow" Charlie said desperately.
"I don't go out in
daylight," snapped Paton.
"You'll have to find
someone else."
THE THUNDER HOUSE
Henry Yewbeam was bored.
Cook's underground rooms were cozy and
interesting, but Henry had explored
every inch of them. He
wished Charlie would come and talk to him. But
Cook said
Charlie had gone home for the
weekend.
Cook seemed to be very
busy even
on a
Saturday.
She had found a
pair of
old pajamas
for Henry
and some modern-looking clothes: long trousers,
black shoes, and gray socks. And
she had
persuaded him to exchange his warm jacket
for a
blue sweater.
Henry found this wasn't as warm as
his jacket,
but at
least he still had the blue cape he
was wearing
when he
came twisting through time.
Cook had hidden the Time
Twister. "I don't want you trying
anything silly again," she said,
wagging her finger at Henry "You're
here for
good now
Thing is, what to do with
you?"
Henry hadn't given up hope.
There had to be a
way back to 1916, otherwise what
would become of him? He
didn't want to return to
Bloor's, of course. But if
he could just get to the
right year, he would eventually
reach his happy home
beside the sea.
"But I'll have to go
through that other world first,”
he said to himself "The world
in the
Time Twister."
When
Henry had traveled through time
he’d briefly glimpsed the world of
the Red
King. His mother,
who was
a Bloor,
had told
him once
that he was descended from this mysterious
Red King.
"Some of the king's descendants
have inherited
a part of his magic,"
Grace Bloor had said. "But
as far
as I can tell, none of us
have." And she had looked
around at her family and laughed
in her
playful comforting way and added, "Thank
goodness!" Henry wished
he could hear her laughter again.
"Charlie's got some of
that magic,"
he said
to himself.
Perhaps he could live with
Charlie? That wouldn't be so bad.
Charlie could teach him to
use all
the new-fangled
things, Cook had told him
about: televisions, videos, computers, and
other amazing things.
He'd been told that Cook
would be back to give
him his lunch at half-past
twelve. But, according to the little
clock beside Henry's bed, it
was still
only ten
o’clock.
"More than two hours
of nothing,"
sighed Henry
He had an idea.
Now that
he was
dressed like all the other boys
at Bloor's,
surely he could do some exploring.
He had
always wanted to go into
the ruin,
but Sir Gideon had forbidden it.
Now was
Henry's chance.
He tiptoed out of Cook's
room, carefully closing the closet door behind him. After
several more closets he found
himself outside the cafeteria and
running toward a loud noise
that was
coming from the hall. He looked in and saw
a big
man with
a shaven
head, hammering something into
the main
door.
Without stopping his work, the
big man
said, Who might you be?"
"I'm — er — Henry."
said Henry
nervously
"Henry what?"
"Er — er — Bone."
Henry didn't know why he'd
said Bone. He just
thought it might be a
bad idea
to say Yewbeam.
"Don't seem very sure, do
ya?" The man continued hammering.
"I'm quite sure, thank you,"
said Henry
"We've got another Bone here.
A real
terror of a Bone."
"He's my cousin."
"I s'pose you're one of
them endowed
kids. Troublemakers, all of them."
The man
delivered a really savage blow
to the
door. "Broke the door, that's
what the
stormy one's done, blast
him!"
"Oh!" Henry continued on his
way to
the garden.
"Taking the dog for a
walk, are ya?" said the
man.
"What?" Henry increased his stride.
"The dog. Miserable beast."
Henry looked down to find
Blessed panting at his feet. "Oh, yes. Come along," he said and walked briskly
to the garden door.
Once outside, Henry stopped to
catch his breath.
Blessed looked as nervous as
he did.
"What's the matter?" said Henry
He bent
down and
patted the old dog's
head. Blessed was very ugly, there
was something
so sad
about his solemn, wrinkled
face, Henry couldn't help feeling
sorry for him.
There were four boys playing
soccer in the snowy slush just ahead of them.
They paid
no attention
to Henry and Blessed as they
walked past. A huge tree
had been sawn into
logs in
the center
of the
field and Henry was tempted to
climb up on them, but
time was precious and he had
to see
the ruin.
When they reached the great
red walls,
Henry felt very excited. The place
smelled of age and danger.
He imagined knights in armor
scrambling over the walls, battle horses
charging through the entrance, and
arrows whizzing overhead. He
was about
to walk
through the huge arched
entrance, when a voice said, "You boy come
here!"
Henry
turned to see two older
boys marching
toward him. They both
wore purple
capes and had grim, unfriendly faces.
"Who are you?" shouted the taller
boy
Henry
plunged into the ruin. He
found himself a square courtyard with
five passages
leading out of it. Henry took
the middle
one.
He could hear
the other
boys murmuring
behind him. Henry ran as fast
as he
could. The passage opened into another open courtyard. Henry
ran across
it and
stumbled down a flight
of steep
stone steps. He was now in
a grassy
glade, ringed with headless statues. In the center of the glade,
two girls
in purple
capes sat on a large stone
tomb. One was very small
and very
dark, with a long
black pigtail and gold-rimmed glasses. The other had a
bright, healthy-looking face and amazing blue
hair.
"Hello," said Henry breathlessly.
"I'm er . . ."
"You're Henry aren't you?" said the
girl with
blue hair. "Charlie told me about you.
They're looking for you, you know The place was
in a
turmoil this morning. Manfred threw loads of music
books out of the tower; he
was in
such a
fury I'm
Olivia and this is Bindi."
"I'm very glad to meet
you." Henry went to shake their
hands. "How do you do?"
"You are polite," said Olivia.
"I expect that comes of being
old."
"Old? I suppose people would
consider me to be old. But
actually I only feel about
eleven years."
"Me, too," said Olivia. "But
then I
am. We
wouldn't normally be here
on Saturday
but we've
got detention."
There was a shout from
the courtyard
above them and Blessed came stumbling
down the
steps.
"They must have followed the
dog," muttered Henry "Two boys chased
me in
here. One was very tall and
wore his
hair like
a girl."
“A ponytail," said Olivia. "That's
Manfred Bloor, the head boy."
"We can't let him find
you," said Bindi. "Quick, get in here."
With surprising speed, the two
girls leaped off the tomb and slid back the
top. Henry
stared into the dark gap. The inside of
the tomb
smelled of mildew and decomposing things.
"Go on," said Olivia. "You
can breathe
in there.
We've tried it."
Another shout from above made
Henry climb into the tomb. The
girls pushed back the lid,
leaving a tiny gap for air.
They swung
themselves back onto the top
just as Manfred and Asa came
rushing down the steps.
"Have you see a strange
boy?" said Manfred.
"We've seen Daniel Robottom," said Olivia, choosing a
boy about
the same
size as
Henry who also wore a blue
cloak. "He went that way!"
She pointed
to an
arched entrance in one
of the
walls.
"Daniel Robottom? Are you sure?"
Asa's yellow eyes narrowed suspiciously
"Of course we're sure," said Bindi. "He was
humming. Daniel always hums."
Manfred and Asa rushed through
the arch.
There was a tap from
inside the tomb.
"Shh!" hissed Olivia. "You can't
come out.
It's not
safe yet."
She was right. A few
minutes later, Manfred and Asa came
running back.
"Are you positive he went
that way?"
said Manfred.
"Cross my heart and hope
to die,"
Olivia said blithely "But he went
back up
those steps about five minutes ago. You must have
missed him."
"What's he done?" asked Bindi.
"None of your business," said Manfred.
"We're looking for someone else,"
added Asa.
Manfred shot him a look
that said,
"Keep quiet!"
"What's my great-grandfather's dog doing
in here?"
asked Manfred.
"We thought we'd take him
for a
walk," Bindi told him.
The two boys turned away
but as
they mounted
the steps, Asa looked
back and
said, "Why are you two
here, anyway?"
"We came for a bit
of peace."
Olivia sighed. "The boys are so
rough."
"I wouldn't stay in the
ruin too
long," Asa gave her a peculiar
smile and followed Manfred up
the steps.
"He gives me the creeps,"
muttered Bindi.
They waited another five minutes
before deciding it was safe enough
to let
Henry out. He scrambled over the side of the
tomb and
dropped onto the grass. His cloak
and trousers
were covered
in green
dust and bits of
cobweb clung to his hair.
"There's a huge toad in
there," he said. "I'm not
very fond of toads."
The girls brushed him down
and then
all three
sat on the tomb and shared
a roll
that Bindi
had managed
to sneak
out of
the cafeteria.
Henry told the girls about
his home
beside the sea, and how he
had come
upon the
Time Twister.
Olivia recounted some of
her famous
mother's adventures while filming in
the jungle.
And then
Bindi described how she
had traveled
to India
to visit
her amazing grandparents.
When the horn called them
in for
lunch, Olivia said, "Come with us,
Henry Stay calm. Don't look
nervous, and when we reach
the cafeteria
you can
slip through into the kitchen."
Henry had only told the
girls he was hiding in
the kitchen. Although he trusted the
girls, he felt it would
be
safer
if no
one knew
exactly where he was.
Unfortunately when he reached the
cafeteria he walked straight into a
lunch lady
"What are you doing in
here?" she asked.
"M . . . m
. .
. message
for Cook,"
stuttered Henry
"She's in the cold room."
The dinner
lady smiled.
She was young and cheerful-looking.
Henry made his way through
the kitchen.
Cook wasn't in the cold room.
He tried
to find
the closet
he'd come out of
but he
kept blundering
into broom
closets and cupboards full
of pots
and pans.
Cook's secret entrance seemed to have
disappeared.
Henry
was fumbling
behind a row of plastic
aprons when a firm
hand came
down on
his shoulder.
Henry froze.
A voice in his ear
hissed, "Henry Yewbeam, where have you
been?"
Henry turned to see Cook's
angry red face.
"I just went for a
little walk," he explained.
"Didn't I tell you not
to leave
here," she whispered harshly "Didn't I? Never do that
again. It's dangerous out there."
"I'm sorry" said Henry contritely
"Took you long enough to
find the
right place, didn't it?" Cook turned
a handle
beside the row of aprons and
a door
swung inward. Without a word
she pushed Henry through the door
into a
stack of mops and brooms. "You'll
have to
find your
own way
now,” she said. "If you're lucky
you'll get lunch in half
an hour." She swiftly closed the
door.
Henry made his way back
to Cook's
rooms. He sat beside the stove,
feeling rather sorry for himself.
Was he to spend the rest
of his
life like
this? Hiding from people who wished
him harm?
Why was
it dangerous
"out there"? He recalled
something Manfred Bloor had said to
the girls.
"What's my great-grandfather's dog doing in
here?"
Who was Manfred's great-grandfather? Was it possible . . . ? No,
it couldn't
be. Could
it? Cousin
Ezekiel would be over a hundred
years old.
It is possible, thought Henry He shuddered. Cousin
Ezekiel is still alive,
and he
still wants to get rid
of me,
one
way or another.
Henry wished the Time Twister
had taken
him somewhere else — Charlie Bone's
house, for instance.
At that moment, Charlie would
rather not have been in his house. He and Benjamin
were sitting
in the
kitchen at number nine,
wondering what to do. Frantic
phone calls had been made
between Charlie, Fidelio, and Gabriel. But
no parent
could be found, or persuaded to give them a
lift up
to the
Heights.
"We could get a taxi,"
Benjamin suggested. "I've got some money"
Charlie didn't think they had
enough. His mother was out at
work and
Maisie was shopping. He didn't
think his uncle would
have any
money and he certainly couldn't
ask Grandma
Bone.
"We're stuck." Charlie stared glumly
out of
the kitchen window
He had hardly spoken when
a luxurious
car drove
into view It pulled
up right
in front
of number
nine, and Lysander jumped out of
the passenger
seat.
He waved at the kitchen
window
Charlie scribbled a note to
his mother,
checked the door key in his
pocket, and ran to the
front door. He opened it just
as Lysander
was about
to ring
the bell.
"Hi there, Charlie!" said Lysander.
"My dad's going to give us
a ride
up to
Gabriel's place."
Benjamin and Runner Bean appeared
behind Charlie.
"Can my friend and his
dog come?"
asked Charlie.
"Of course. More is merrier,"
said
Lysander. "Come."
Benjamin, Charlie, and Runner Bean
followed Lysander down the
steps to the car. Lysander
got in
the front, while the
others climbed in the back.
They found Fidelio already tucked into
the deep
leather seat.
"How do you do, boys,"
said the
very handsome
black man sitting in
the driver's
seat.
"My dad," said Lysander quickly
"He's a judge, but don't let
that scare
you."
"How do you do, Judge,"
said Benjamin
and Charlie,
slightly daunted by this imposing
man.
The car purred away from
the curb,
sailed down Filbert Street, around the
park, and then up through
the city Up and
up and
up. None
of them
noticed the yellow taxi that was
following them. The car was
now climbing the steep
road up
to the
Heights. They passed several grand houses
and then
they were
beyond the fashionable area and
skirting the borders of a wild-looking
wood. The judge pulled up
outside a rather dilapidated building with
a very
muddy yard. Hens scratched in the dirt
and a
goat with
large horns was chewing a bush.
"This is as far
as I
go, boys,"
said the
judge.
"Couldn't you take us up
to the
top, Dad?"
asked Lysander.
"I'm not driving my new
car up
there," said his lather. "Too
much turbulence."
As they got out, they
could hear thunder rumbling in the distance.
"Good luck, young fellows!" The judge backed into
the muddy
yard, turned his car, and
drove down the hill.
"Will he come and get
us?" asked Benjamin, anxiously
"Might," said Lysander. "Might be Mom, though."
A little further down the
hill, and out of sight
of the boys, the yellow taxi
had pulled
up. An
odd-looking creature got out; an
old man
in a
long, dirty raincoat. He had a
white mustache but tufts of
ginger hair stuck out from under
his filthy
tweed cap. He paid the driver
and then
began to run up the
hill, not moving like an old
man at
all, but
more like
a schoolboy
Charlie had never been so high above the
city The
view was magnificent, but there was something
unsettling
about
such a
high and
windy place. The trees behind them sighed ominously and
the thunder
became more persistent.
They were about to walk
into the
yard when
Gabriel came out of
the dilapidated
house. He was wearing long, muddy
boots and splashed deliberately through the deepest puddles. His
jeans were so dirty the mud
hardly made a difference.
"Hi!" Gabriel raised his left hand.
"Look! Good as new."
"Glad to hear it," said
Lysander. "Are we all ready then?"
"Ready for anything," said Fidelio.
They set off Lysander and
Gabriel leading the way After a
while the road became rough
and narrow;
and then it petered out altogether.
They found
themselves at a gate. A wooden sign, marked THUNDER HOUSE, had been nailed to the top
bar. Beneath
this a
smaller sign read, BEWARE OF THE WEATHER!
"What does that mean?" said Benjamin.
"We'll soon find out," said Fidelio.
Beyond
the gate
a narrow
lane led
between rows of dark evergreens. The tops of the
trees thrashed violently in the
wind that
swirled overhead and twigs, stones, and dead grass came
bowling down the lane.
"Here goes," said Lysander, opening
the gate.
"I've been here before,
but it's
never been this windy"
The others followed him through.
They were
immediately struck by flying debris.
"This isn't going to be easy"
muttered Charlie.
Leaning into the wind, the
two leaders
set off
up the lane. Behind them Fidelio,
Charlie, and Benjamin walked in a
huddle, with Runner Bean anxiously
winding around their legs.
With
every step they took, the
wind grew
fiercer, and now sharp little bolts
of hail
peppered their faces. Charlie took a peek around
Lysander and saw an awesome
gray stone
building. The roof was divided
into three very steep triangles, the
middle section resembling a tower.
The windows
were long
and narrow,
and
the porch roof
echoed the sharp angle of
the center gable. A weather vane
in the
shape of a hammer whirled madly at the very
top of
the building. Every now and again the whole
building shook violently.
As they drew near to
the house,
the porch
door opened and out came a man
with frizzy
blond hair and a beard to match.
He must
have been
nearly seven feet tall because he
banged his head on the
top of the door frame when
he stepped
through it.
"It's no use," the big
man roared,
as the
boys battled
their way toward the house.
"I've tried to calm him down,
but we've
got to
let this
storm blow itself out."
"We need him, Mr. Tors
son!" Lysander shouted through the wind.
"I know! I know; but
Tancred's got this weather thing worse than I have.
I can't
manage him at all."
The determined gang had now
reached the shelter of the house.
Not that
it gave
them much
protection. The wind came
at them
from every
direction, tearing their hair and making
their eyes stream with tears.
Mr. Torsson stood with his
arms across
his chest,
braced against the hail
that battered
his broad
back. "I've
tried to reason with him."
He coughed
and a
deep rumble echoed somewhere in his
chest. "He's locked himself
in his
room. Furniture's probably in smithereens
by now
My wife
. .
." He gave another cough,
this one coinciding with
a bolt
of lightning
that came
sizzling down a nearby
tree.
They
all watched
the tree
crash to the ground, its feathery branches alight with flames.
These were soon put out, however, by the
deluge that suddenly poured from the sky In a
brief moment of quiet before
the next clap of thunder, Mr.
Torsson said sadly "My poor
wife's got a terrible
headache."
"Can we just come in
and talk
to Tancred?"
begged Lysander.
"Not a chance," said Mr.
Torsson, planting himself firmly inside the
porch. "It's too dangerous. You'll
just have to come back another
time. Be careful on the way
back. There's something out there."
"What. . . ?" Gabriel
began.
His next words were drowned
by a
furious crack of thunder, and they
all found
themselves ducking. Something hit the
ground with a heavy thud
right behind them.
Runner Bean howled hysterically and Benjamin shouted, "W .
. .
w .
. .
what was
that?"
"A hammer," said Mr. Torsson.
He disappeared
into the house and they heard
the rattle
of locks
and bolts
behind the door.
"Well, that's that, I guess,"
sighed Lysander. "Let's go back through
the woods.
There'll be more shelter under the trees."
They raced to the woods
but Runner
Bean, barking with excitement, began to
dig at
the ground.
"What's the matter with him?"
said Charlie.
"He's found the hammer," said Benjamin breathlessly "Runner, here, boy Leave
it. Now!
It's not
a bone!"
The woods were full of
thorny bushes and brambles that
scratched their faces and tore
their clothes. And there was something
else: a feeling of being watched.
"I don't like this," muttered Lysander. "Let's try and get back to
the lane."
The lane couldn't be found.
They fanned
out, calling
to one
another as they searched. "Not
this way!"Can't
see it."
"Help, we're lost!" "Must be
this way.”
"Not here."
All at once,
Charlie found himself alone. It
had become very dark. Thunder still
grumbled in the distance, but
the trees
were eerily
still. And then he saw the
terrible eyes: twin pools of
light, moving closer through the undergrowth.
With a
yell of
terror, Charlie turned and threw himself
at a
tangle of bushes.
"Help!" he shouted. "Help! Where are you all?"
He could hear
barking, but it was difficult
to tell
where it came from.
"Runner!"
he shouted. "Runner Bean, here, boy!"
There
was a
deep snarl
behind him and Charlie hurled himself away from it.
He tore
through the woods, banging into trees, tripping,
falling, scrambling on his knees, until he saw
a pale
strip of road. He crawled onto
it and
looked up to see four
boys staring at him in horror.
"Charlie! You look a real
mess," Fidelio exclaimed.
"You don't look so good
yourself" said Charlie. “How did you
find the
road?"
"We'd still be in the
woods if it wasn't for
Runner," said Gabriel. "What
happened to you, Charlie? We
called and called."
"Didn't hear," said Charlie. He
got to
his feet
and shook the twigs out of
his hair.
"There was something in there. An animal."
"I know we heard it,"
said Lysander
grimly "Whatever it was, it
didn't want us in those
woods. Let's get away from here."
They staggered back to Gabriel's
house and found the inside of
the ramshackle
building surprisingly warm and comfortable. When the boys had
cleaned themselves at the
kitchen sink, they fell into
their chairs and gazed at mounds
of roast
beef mashed
potatoes, and vegetables, not knowing where to
start.
"Charlie, your mom was on
the telephone,"
said Mrs. Silk. "1 told her
you'd gone for a walk
with your
friends, and would be
coming back here for your
tea.”
"Thanks, Mrs. Silk!" Charlie wondered
if his
mother had gotten his note. He
wouldn't put it past Grandma
Bone to have hidden it.
Gabriel had three sisters who
squeezed themselves in between the
boys and
kept up
an endless
stream of chatter. The
boys were
too exhausted
to join in. Lysander hardly said
a ord
throughout the meal.
"Not a very promising start
to the
new term,
is it?”
said Mrs. Silk. "What
with Gabriel's
glove and all." She was a
neat, pretty woman with round
blue eyes
and brown curly hair; not a
bit like
Gabriel.
It wasn't easy
having an endowed child in
the family but Mrs. Silk did
her best.
She had
no idea where Gabriel's strange talent (if
you could
call it that) came from. She and her
husband were always arguing about which side of the family was
responsible for it. She had a strong suspicion that it
came from the Silks, some of whom were peculiar to say the least, Gabriel could never wear secondhand
clothes, and as they were not a rich family Mrs. Silk often had to buy secondhand
things for the girls. They found this very unfair.
After tea Gabriel took his friends to see his famous
gerbils, and then as it began to get late, Mrs. Silk drove everyone to their
own front doors in a battered Land Rover. "Hope your mom wasn't
worried," she called as Charlie climbed the steps of number nine.
Maisie met him in the hall.
"The Yewbeams are here," she muttered.
"I'm off to watch my TV Good luck, Charlie!"
SKARPO
THE SORCEROR
Grandma Bone's three sisters were usually entertained
in the tidy room across the hall, but today here they were, sitting around the
table and swamping the normally cozy room with their dreadful dark clothes and
sour faces.
They had
draped their black coats across the chairs and dumped their large black bags on
the dresser. There was a half-eaten
cake, oozing cream, on the table and the room smelled of stale pastries and old
lavender.
Charlie tried to make the best of things. "Hello,
aunties," he said cheerfully "What a surprise!"
"I'm surprised your mother lets you stay out so
late," said Aunt Lucretia. "Where've you been?"
"Where's
Mom?" said Charlie, looking around.
"Where's Mom? Where's my mommy?" said Aunt
Eustacia in a silly voice.
Charlie looked at the cake. No one offered him a
slice.
"Your mother is out," said Grandma Bone.
"Where?"
"Dearie me, we are in a state about our mommy aren’t
we?" cooed Venetia, the youngest and most deadly of the sisters.
"I'm not in a state," said Charlie
indignantly "It's just :hat I'm surprised she's not here."
"She's gone to the theater," said Grandma
Bone. "She had two free tickets to see Divine Drums. Naturally she wanted to take
you, but you weren't here, were you?"
"She didn't say anything about tickets to
me," said Charlie. "Where did they come from?"
"We don't know everything about your mom, do
we?" said Aunt Eustacia. "She probably got them from her
boyfriend."
"She hasn't got a boyfriend," said Charlie.
"How do you know?" said Aunt Venetia,
patting her hair, which was coiled above her head like a black serpent.
"She's still a young woman."
"She doesn't need a boyfriend," said
Charlie, "because my dad's still alive."
Icy silence descended on the kitchen. The four sisters
stiffened. Their mouths tightened into grim dark lines.
Grandma Bone said, "Why do you persist in this nonsense, boy?Your father
died. We had a funeral."
"But there was no body" said Charlie. He
turned to leave but all four sisters shouted, "STOP!"
Taken by surprise, Charlie did stop.
"You haven't told us about Henry" said Grandma
Bone.
"There's nothing to tell," said Charlie.
"You're a very stupid boy," said Matron
Lucretia. "Do you think we don't
know about the Time Twister? Do you
think we haven't heard how Ezekiel Bloor sent his little cousin Henry spinning
away through, time. And now he has ended up at the academy a few years too late
for his own good."
"Ha! Ha! Ha!" cackled Aunt Eustacia nastily
"It's not a joke," said Charlie angrily
"How would you like it?"
"Got you!" snapped Grandma Bone. “Admit
you've seen him!"
Charlie stamped his foot. "I won't admit
nothing."
"Anything," screamed Aunt Lucretia.
"Grammar, boy! You won't admit
anything!"
"Oh, yes, he will!" Grandma Bone leaped to
her feet. "Where is he?" she screeched. "We'll find him eventually,
you know. But if he doesn't come out soon,
old Ezekiel's going to be in such a mood he'll send him back to the Ice
Age."
"He can't," said Charlie. "Not without
the Time Twister."
"You have no idea what Ezekiel can do," said
Aunt Venetia in her dangerous, silky tone. "Some of it's too horrible for
words. Why won't you tell us where this wretched Henry is hiding? He doesn't
deserve your loyalty. He's just a
nuisance. Why can't you be a good boy for a change? I would hate for Ezekiel to
hurt you, my pet."
Charlie had no idea what to say to this. Aunt Venetia
always managed to catch him off-guard by being nice. Luckily the door opened and Uncle Paton
looked in.
"What was all that noise?" said Paton.
"I can't hcar myself think."
"Thoughts are supposed to be silent," said
Eustacia with a giggle.
"Don't
be silly" said Paton. "Be so good as to turn down the volume. My work
has reached a very critical stage. I can't have my concentration ruined by a gaggle of screeching
geese."
"Screeching?" screeched Aunt Lucretia.
In a more
reasonable tone, Grandma Bone said, "We're interrogating Charlie about
something of vital importance."
"Well, I need him for something more
important," said Paton. "Come along, Charlie!"
Charlie sprang gratefully toward his uncle, but Grandma
Bone hadn't finished.
"The boy stays here," she said, "until
we've got the truth out of him."
Uncle Paton sighed. He directed his gaze toward the lamp hanging over the table.
"Paton!" said Grandma Bone sharply. “You wouldn't dare."
"I would," said Paton.
The next moment there was a small explosion, the four
sisters leaped away from the table as a shower of broken glass fell from the
lamp and settled on
the cake.
"Come on, Charlie," said Paton.
Charlie quickly followed his uncle out of the kitchen,
while Grandma Bone and the aunts, twittering like birds, jumped about, looking
for dishcloths, picking glass off the cake, and dusting down their clothes.
"Thanks for getting me out of there, Uncle
Paton," said Charlie, as he closed Paton's door behind him.
"Not at all, not at all. I really do need you,
Charlie." Paton seemed very excited about something. "I've been
experimenting. Look!"
He took a book from his desk, opened it, and began to
read. Still reading, he walked to the switch by the door and turned on the
light that hung in the center of the room.
Expecting the light to shatter, Charlie ducked. But nothing happened.
"I thought that you took all the lightbulbs out of
your room," said Charlie.
"So I did, so I did," Paton murmured, still
intent on his reading, "but I've put one back."
"So what's going on?" said Charlie.
"Turn the light off dear boy" said Paton.
"I can't talk and concentrate on my book at the same time."
Mystified, Charlie turned off the light. His uncle's
room was once again bathed in the soft glow from the oil lamp on his desk.
"So, Charlie, are you surprised the lightbulb
didn't break?" asked Paton.
"Well, yes," said Charlie, "but then
you don't always break them, do you? Not if you're, kind of relaxed."
"Exactly." Paton gave a sigh of
satisfaction. "When my mind's switched off" he laughed, "if
you'll excuse the pun. When my thoughts are elsewhere, as it were, I'm less
prone to accidents of the electrical kind. So — I decided if I read a very
engrossing book while in the presence of an electrified lightbulb, the bulb
might not shatter."
"I see," Charlie said slowly "That's
very interesting, Uncle Paton."
"More than interesting, dear boy It worked. It's
a darn miracle." Paton beamed with triumph. "I can go out in daylight
if I'm reading a book. I can walk past lighted shop windows. I can walk near
traffic lights without breaking them. Perhaps, I can even enter a coffee shop —
if I'm reading."
Charlie could see drawbacks in his uncle's plan. It
would be dangerous for Paton to wander through the city streets, not seeing
where he was going. "It could be a bit chancy," he said. "You
might get run over."
"That's where you come in, Charlie. If you were
with me, you could see the pitfalls. I thought tomorrow we might take a walk in
the direction of the cathedral, just to test my theory"
"I take it that you mean in the direction of
Ingledew's Books," said Charlie.
His uncle
went pink, especially around the ears. He
gave a small cough and said, "I can't deny it. Miss Ingledew has been much in my thoughts.
I feel that were she to see me, walking about in daylight, she wouldn't think me such a
freak."
"She
doesn't think you're a freak, Uncle. It's just that trying to be a mom to
Emma is using up all her energy."
Paton gave a huge sigh and shook his head. "No.
Charlie. She's wary of me, and who could blame her.”
"OK.
Tomorrow we'll take a walk to Ingledew's,” said Charlie, a little reluctant to be drawn away from
the things on his mind.
"Thank you, Charlie!"
The telephone in the hall began to ring.
"I wonder if that's for me," muttered
Charlie.
"Better find out," said Paton. “You can bet
that my sisters won't pass on any messages."
Charlie went out to the landing and looked down into
the hall. He was just in time to see Grandma Bone pick up the receiver, and
shout, "He's not here!" and bang it down again.
"Was that for me?" asked Charlie.
Grandma Bone glared up at him. "Of course
not," she said. "Who do you think you are?"
"I live here," said Charlie, "and it's
just possible my friends might want to talk to me."
"Ha!" snorted Grandma Bone.
The Yewbeam aunts emerged from the kitchen. They were
still brushing down their coats and patting their heads.
"There's a bit," cried Venetia, grabbing a
lock of Eustacia's gray hair.
Eustacia yelled, "Get it out! Get it out!"
Unfortunately Aunt Lucretia looked up and saw Charlie
smiling. "You can wipe that grin off your face," she said. "We
haven't finished with you, yet."
The three sisters trooped out through the front door
and then stood on the step, whispering to Grandma Bone.
The telephone rang again and this time Charlie swooped
down the stairs and picked up the receiver before Grandma Bone could get to it.
"Hi. Is that you, Charlie?" It was Gabriel.
"Yes," said Charlie cautiously
“A nasty voice told me you weren't there, but I didn't
believe her."
"My grandma," said Charlie.
Grandma Bone closed the front door and stood watching
Charlie.
"Is she there?" asked Gabriel.
"Yes," said Charlie, turning his back on
Grandma Bone.
"Look, Charlie. I found something in the lane outside
our house. Several things actually I think you ought to see them."
"Where shall we meet?" asked Charlie.
"Mom's delivering some stuff to the Pets' Café tomorrow afternoon," said
Gabriel. "Meet me there."
Charlie had never heard of the Pets' Café.
"Where's that?"
"Frog Street," said Gabriel. "Between
Mud Lane and Water Street. Just behind the cathedral."
This was good news. "I'm going there with my uncle,"
said Charlie. "Can I bring him?"
"Sure. Is it your glass-breaking uncle? He's
brilliant."
"It is."
"Great. Got to go now See you tomorrow about
three o'clock. Ouch! Gerbil bit me. Bye!"
There was a loud clunk. It sounded as if Gabriel had
dropped the phone.
When Charlie looked around, Grandma Bone had gone. He
peeped into the kitchen. She wasn't there so Charlie made himself a quick snack
and sat down. The table had been cleared of broken glass but something lay
where the cake had been — a small picture, placed face down. Charlie guessed
that it had been left there on purpose and, knowing his aunts, he was sure that
it was a trick. But what sort of trick? He concentrated on his food, refusing
to look at the picture.
And then he began to wonder if it really was a trick.
Gradually Charlie's gaze was drawn to the dark panel at the back of the picture.
It looked very old; the wood was cracked and covered with tiny worm holes, the
screws were rusty and the string had broken.
Charlie took a breath and flipped the frame over. He
saw a small painting of a room. But what kind of room? He couldn't resist taking
in the details.
On the right of the painting, a tall man in a black
robe was looking at a skull that lay at his feet. The man's dark beard was
threaded with silver and he wore a round black skullcap on his silver hair. A
table covered in red cloth stood in an alcove behind the man. The table was
piled with books, bowls, feathers, bundles of herbs, animal horns, and gleaming
weapons. The bare stone walls had been
covered in strange symbols and the man was in the act of drawing another: a
star with five points.
Charlie found himself staring at the skull. He tried to
look away from it, but he couldn't. He began to hear sounds; a low chanting in
a strange language, the scraping of chalk on stone, the rustle of heavy robes.
And then, suddenly the man turned his head and looked at Charlie, looked right
into his eyes.
Charlie gasped and quickly whipped the painting over.
Out in the street a car door slammed and he heard his mother's voice. A man
spoke and his mother laughed. She rarely laughed. What had the man said, and
who was he?
When Mrs. Bone walked into the kitchen, Charlie could
still see the yellow eyes of the man in the black robe, fixing him with a glare
of triumph.
"Charlie, are you all right?" said Amy Bone.
"You look very pale."
"I, er . . ." Charlie touched the back of
the painting. He found that he couldn't explain what had happened to him, so he
asked, "Where were you?" There was a nasty whine in his voice that he
couldn't help.
"I've been to see Divine Drums. I wanted you to come with us,
but you weren't here. Charlie?"
"Us?" said Charlie, sounding even more sulky
"Who's us?"
"Bob
Davies and myself." Mrs. Bone smiled encouragingly. "He got three
tickets and you were supposed to have come. I couldn't disappoint him when I found
you weren't here, could I?"
"Who's this Bob Davies?" asked Charlie,
hating the whine in his voice.
"Charlie, what's come over you?" Mrs. Bone
pulled out a chair and sat beside him. "Bob's just a friend, a very nice
man who wanted to take us to the theater. Why are you so grumpy?"
Charlie
was ashamed. He said, "I'm sorry Mom.
I. . . something happened to me,
just now The aunts left that." He nodded at the painting, not wanting even
to touch it.
Mrs. Bone
picked up the painting. "The Sorcerer," she said, reading the painted
scrawl at the bottom of the picture.
Charlie hadn't even noticed that the painting had a title.
"I think it was a trick," he murmured.
"What sort of trick, Charlie?"
"I don't know yet." He carefully turned the
painting over again.
"Tell you what," said Mrs. Bone, patting
Charlie's shoulder. "I'll just run upstairs and change my clothes, and
then we'll have a nice cup of tea before you go to bed, shall we?"
"Yes," said Charlie, wondering how a cup of
tea could take away the memory of the sorcerer's eyes.
He noted the sparkle of sequins on his mother's dress
as she began to unbutton her coat. "Mom, Dad might not be . . ."
Mrs. Bone swung around. "Might not be what?"
"Might not be dead," Charlie said quietly
"Oh, Charlie, bless you. Of course, he is."
She gave Charlie a peck on the cheek and hastened out. She didn't seem as sad
as she usually did at the thought of his father. This worried Charlie.
Mrs. Bone had only been gone a few seconds when Uncle
Paton poked his head around the door. He
was holding a lighted candle. "1 feel hungry," he said. "Mind if
I turn the light out, Charlie?"
Charlie shook his head. The lamp above the table went
out and Uncle Paton walked to the fridge. He brought out a plate of cold ham and
tomatoes. He set the plate and a candle on the table. He was about to speak
when he saw the back of the painting.
"I hope that isn't what I think it is," said
Paton.
"What do you think it is?" asked Charlie,
alarmed by his uncle's grim expression.
"I'm very much afraid that it might be……..” He turned the painting face up
and sighed. "Yes, I thought so. 1 suppose my sisters left it here."
"Is it someone in the family?" asked
Charlie.
"Indeed, yes. His name was Skarpo," said
Paton , "and he was a very powerful sorcerer."
"Uncle Paton, my . . . my endowment,"
Charlie spoke hesitantly "I thought it only worked with photos."
Paton stared at Charlie. "Do you mean that you have heard . . .?" He pointed
at the sorcerer. "Did this man speak to you?"
"Not exactly," said Charlie, "I just
heard . . ."
"Charlie!" Paton slammed the painting face
down on the table. "You didn't go in, did you?"
"Go in?" said Charlie wildly "What do
you mean 'go in'? I was just looking at it when he . . . when he turned his
head and stared at me."
Paton regarded Charlie with a mixture of fear and
concern. "Then he has seen you," he said gravely
And as his uncle spoke, Charlie heard the moan of a
chill wind. He heard the rattle of chains, a terrible cry and the shrill, dry
chanting of Skarpo the sorcerer.
THE
PETS’ CAFÉ
For a few
seconds, Charlie and his great-uncle looked at each other in complete silence.
And then Paton sat at the table and said, "I
wish I'd known about this before, but to tell the truth, Charlie, I've only
just learned what your endowment could lead to."
"I don't understand," said Charlie. At the
back of his mind he could still hear the dreadful chanting voice.
"It's like this," said Paton. “As you know,
I've been working on a history of the Yewbeams and their ancestor, the Red
King. This has entailed a great deal of research, in the course of which I have
come across several characters whose talents are very similar to yours and
those of your friends. One of them, a certain Charles Pennybuck, began by hearing portraits
speak — he lived long before photos had arrived
on the scene — this eventually led to his entering the portraits and
conversing directly with the — how shall we say — the persons depicted in the
paintings
"You mean, they could see him, too?"
"Oh, yes," said Paton. "Unfortunately
poor Pennybuck came to a very sticky end. Got caught in the portrait of a
really nasty character, the Count of Corbeau, if I remember rightly Went quite mad."
"Who?" asked Charlie. "Pennybuck or the
count?"
"Pennybuck, of course," said Paton. "Oh
dear, I probably shouldn't have told you that, Charlie. Now, you mustn't worry
I'm sure it won't happen to you."
"But what about Skarpo?" said Charlie
anxiously "I mean if he's seen me . . ."
"Ah, Skarpo!" Paton went to the fridge and
took out a bottle of cider. "Hm." He took two glasses from a cupboard
and brought them to the table.
"Skarpo," Charlie prompted. "You were
saying?"
"Skarpo lived about five hundred years ago. This
portrait is very old." Paton tapped the back of the picture. "He was
the kind of sorcerer that Ezekiel Bloor would like to have been, but old
Ezekiel could never manage anything like Skarpo."
"Such as what?" asked Charlie.
"Better for you not to know." Paton held up
the bottle. "Want some cider,
dear boy? I'm sure you could do with some." He poured a glass for himself.
"No, thanks," said Charlie impatiently
"Uncle Paton, I think you might tell me a bit more about Skarpo. I mean what's going to happen to me now that
he’s' seen me?"
"I've
no idea," said Paton. "Perhaps nothing will happen. And then again,
perhaps you can actually make use of his power. There was a lot of it, according
to my books. Just be on your guard, Charlie. If you find yourself acting
strangely then come and tell me, and we'll try and figure something out."
This
wasn't very reassuring, but Charlie realized it was the best he could hope for.
He decided to take a sip of Paton's cider and then another.
"Feasting in the dark," said Mrs. Bone,
turning on
the light.
"Woops!"
said Paton, averting his eyes from the lamp. "Watch out, Amy I've already
had one accident today."
"Sorry Paton, I forgot." Mrs. Bone turned
off the light and proceeded to make a pot of tea by candlelight.
Charlie took his mug of tea up to bed. When he left
the kitchen Paton was listening, enraptured, as Mrs. Bone described every scene
in Divine Drums. Because of his
light-exploding problem he hadn't been able to visit a theater since he was a
child, and he loved to listen to Amy Bone's animated accounts. She could be a
very good storyteller, when she did something out of the ordinary
The following afternoon, Charlie and his uncle set off
for the Pets' Café. At the end of Filbert Street, they met Benjamin and Runner
Bean.
"Why is your uncle reading a book?" asked
Benjamin, as if Paton were not there.
Charlie's uncle was hardly aware of Benjamin, he was
concentrating fiercely on the large book that he held only a few inches from
his nose.
Charlie explained that it was an experiment.
“Ah," said Benjamin with a knowing smile.
"Can me and Runner come, too? You might need extra help."
The two boys walked on either side of Paton, while Runner Bean loped ahead. It was a chilly gray Sunday and luckily there
weren't many people about. Charlie felt slightly embarrassed, walking beside a
man with his nose in a large book.
There was a tricky moment when they reached the
traffic lights. Paton was about to walk across a red light, when the boys
shouted, "NO!" Paton glanced up startled, and Charlie whispered
urgently "Don't look at the lights, Uncle Paton!"
“Ahem," murmured Paton, stepping back onto the
curb.
"Whew!" breathed Benjamin. "That was
close."
They
resumed their journey avoiding traffic lights where they could, and guiding
Paton across the busiest roads. At last they found Water Street and, a little
further on, a narrow alley with the sign of a frog high on the wall.
"Doesn't look like a proper sign," Benjamin
commented.
"It must be Frog Street," said Charlie,
"because it's next to Water Street." He didn't dare to ask his uncle
for advice because there was a
lighted window just below the frog sign.
Runner Bean settled the question. He ran down the alley barking excitedly and
the boys had no option but to follow him. It seemed a very unlikely place for a
café, but as they walked further from the main road they began to hear the
barks, grunts, and screechings of many creatures.
"Sounds like a zoo," said Benjamin.
Runner Bean had disappeared around a bend at the end
of the alley and was now barking deliriously Charlie put a hand on his uncle's
arm and steered him around the corner.
And there was the Pets' Café. It appeared to have been
built into an ancient wall and filled the entire end of the alley On one side a
small green door stood open to the street, and on the other a group of dogs
stood barking at Runner Bean through a huge latticed window: Above the window
there was a sign filled with paintings of animals. The words THE PETS' CAFÉ could just be made out between twirling tails, paws. whiskers,
wings, and claws.
"This is it," said Charlie, guiding Paton to
the door.
Benjamin grabbed Runner Bean's collar and they all
went in.
The crescendo of animal noises was so loud Charlie
could hardly hear his own voice. "I can see a counter right at the
back," he shouted to Benjamin.
Before they could get there, a large man with curly
black hair stepped in front of them. He was wearing a long white shirt decorated
with elephant heads.
"Animals?" he said.
"No," said Charlie. "We're human."
"I know that," the man said impatiently
"Where are your companions? No one's allowed in without an animal, bird,
or reptile."
"Oh." Charlie's face fell.
"We've got a dog," Benjamin piped up.
"He's over there, talking to a labrador."
"One animal each," said the man.
"Otherwise, out!" He pointed to the door.
Paton was finding it difficult to concentrate on his
book. He held it even closer to his
face in his efforts to avoid looking at the lights twinkling in the low
ceiling. "Ahem," he muttered. And then, in a low voice, "Smells
awful. Let's go."
Charlie was just wondering what to do next when Gabriel
appeared, holding a large wooden box. He took two gerbils from the box, handed
one to Charlie and popped another in Paton's top pocket.
. "Er — no," Paton objected, touching a
gerbil nose. But it was too late.
The large man said, "That's better," and
ushered them up to the counter. Here they were faced with a difficult choice.
All along the counter among plates of ordinary cookies there were bowls of
sausages, cakes that smelled of fish, round pellets that could have been
chocolate (or might not have been), and seeds of various sizes.
"I recommend the sausages," said Gabriel.
"They're delicious."
"They look as if they could be for dogs,"
said Charlie.
"Probably are," said Gabriel. "They're
still delicious. The gerbils love them."
"Cookies and three waters, please," said
Charlie playing safe.
The man behind the counter said, "If it isn't
Charlie Bone."
Charlie blinked. At last he recognized Mr. Onimous,
the mouse-catcher. It was his pointy-toothed smile that gave him away He looked
very different in his chef's white hat and apron. The last time Charlie had
seen him he'd been wearing a fake-fur coat and a velvet waistcoat.
"What are you doing here, Mr. Onimous?"
Charlie asked.
"Giving my wife a helping hand," said Mr.
Onimous. "It's her café, you know Her idea entirely Good, isn't it?"
"Brilliant," said Charlie. "But do the
flame cats mind all these other visitors? I mean, they live with you, don't
they?"
"The flames?" Mr. Onimous raised his
whiskery eyebrows. "They're not often here, bless 'em. Far too busy with
their own particular duties. They pop in around midnight for a quick bite and a
snooze, and then they're off again. Unless they need me, of course. In which
case I have to follow them."
"I see." Charlie paid for the food. It was
very cheap.
"Good to see you, Charlie," said Mr.
Onimous. "You take care, now!"
"You, too, Mr. Onimous."
The line behind Charlie was growing, so he took his
tray to the table where his friends were sitting. He had to push his way
through a crowd of dogs before he could reach the table. Gabriel had chosen a
place right beside the window and they were able to watch the strange
assortment of customers approaching the café.
At the table beside them a tarantula crawled around a
red straw hat. The woman wearing the hat seemed quite happy about the situation.
Now and again she passed tidbits up to the tarantula. Fearing the tidbits were
alive, Charlie looked away
"What have you got to show us, then?" he
asked Gabriel.
Gabriel pulled a plastic bag from under the table. "Look!" He reached into the bag and
drew out an old tweed coat and a battered cap.
"Asa's disguise!" said Charlie.
"Exactly I even found the mustache." Gabriel
held up a strip of white whiskers. "They were lying in the lane outside
our yard. I reckon the wind from the Thunder House blew them there. Asa
probably hid them in the woods."
Charlie shuddered. "You mean it was Asa in the
woods. Asa as a . . . whatever he can turn into when it's getting dark?"
"Does he have to take all his clothes off,"
asked Benjamin, "before he turns into a beast?"
Gabriel frowned at him. "This is serious,
Benjamin."
"Sorry I just wondered."
"Why would Asa go all the way up to the
Heights?" murmured Charlie. "Does he live there?"
"I don't know where he lives," said Gabriel.
"But I think he was warning us off. He was trying to make sure we wouldn't go back to the
Thunder House."
"But why?" asked Charlie.
Gabriel shrugged. "Perhaps it's got something to
do with your cousin Henry That evil old man who sent him through time knows
he's come back. He's probably furious."
"Of course," said Charlie. "Ezekiel has
ordered Manfred and Asa to find Henry But they know that we'll protect him —
you, me, Lysander, and Tancred. So they're trying to split us up, weaken us.
Have you told Lysander about the clothes?"
"Couldn't contact him," said Gabriel.
"I'll see him tomorrow."
At that moment a body flung itself at the window
Charlie looked up to see Asa Pike glaring at them through the small glass
panes. His lips were drawn back in a horrible snarl, and his yellow eyes darted
around the table until he saw the bag of clothes.
"Mine," he rasped. "Give them here, you
wretches!
His sudden appearance caused an uproar in the café.
Terrified birds fluttered, screeching, to the ceiling; dogs threw back their
heads and howled; cats hissed and spat; rabbits rushed under tables, and
everything else hid behind the large potted plants standing around the room.
"He's not very popular, is he?" Benjamin
said in a shaky voice.
"Keep reading, Uncle Paton," Charlie warned.
The café was already in turmoil without his uncle
breaking glass. Food was flying everywhere, plates had been smashed, drinks had
been spilled, and anxious customers were tripping over frightened animals.
"Look out," said Gabriel. "Here he
comes!"
Asa crashed through the door and walked straight into
the man in the elephant shirt.
Animal?" said the man, who was evidently a sort
of bouncer.
For a moment Charlie thought Asa was going to say he
was an animal, but he just snarled into the man's face.
"That's it!" said the bouncer.
"Out!"
He grabbed Asa by the scruff of his scrawny neck and
thrust him out onto the pavement. Asa whipped around and was about to burst in
again, when several large dogs rushed through the open door and set upon him.
Asa gave a high-pitched yell and ran off around the corner,
followed by the pack of baying dogs. If Benjamin hadn't leaped up and grabbed
Runner Bean's collar, he would have joined the chase. The big dog was very
disappointed to miss the fun and whined monotonously until Mr. Onimous gave him
a rainbow-colored bone to chew
The Pets' Café was emptying rapidly Several customers
had gone racing after their dogs, and the others, having caught and calmed
their pets, had decided to leave before things got worse.
Charlie and his friends stayed to help Mr. Onimous and
the bouncer, Norton Cross, clear up the mess.
"That tall fellow is a bit of a lazy
layabout," Norton remarked, glancing at Paton, who was still reading his
book.
"He can have — accidents," said Charlie
awkwardly. "So it's best that he
doesn't help."
"He's special," said Mr. Onimous, winking at
Charlie
"Oh, no. Not one of them is he? We've got more
than our fair share of oddballs in this city," grumbled Norton. "That
one the dogs chased — you could tell he was peculiar. Animals always know when
something ain't right."
Mrs. Silk, who had finished her deliveries, came
through a door at the back of the counter. She was followed by an extremely
tall woman with pale wispy hair and a very long nose. Surprisingly this turned
out to be Mrs. Onoria Onimous. She was a gentle, friendly person and seemed to
like children almost as much as animals.
When, at last, the café was restored to order, Mrs. Silk
offered the boys a lift back to Filbert Street. “And your father, too,"
she said, glancing at Paton. "If that is your father."
"No, I haven't got a . . . no, that's not my
father," said Charlie. “And we've got to go somewhere else, thanks all the same."
"OK, then. 'Bye, boys. Come along, Gabriel."
Mrs. Silk made for the door.
Gabriel reached over and rescued his gerbil from
Paton's pocket, who didn't seem to notice. He pulled his other gerbil out of
Charlie's pocket. Luckily it had gone to sleep and had only eaten a peppermint
stuck to the bottom of the pocket. "See you tomorrow;" said Gabriel.
"It should be interesting. I wonder if Asa's been bitten."
He staggered after his mother with the bag of old
clothes under one arm, and his box of gerbils hugged to his chest with the
other.
Charlie tapped his uncle's shoulder and said, "We
can go now Uncle Paton."
Paton stood up, his eyes still glued to the page he
was reading. Charlie steered him outside where they found Benjamin clipping a
leash to Runner Bean's collar. "Just in case he gets the urge to chase
something,” Benjamin explained.
Their walk to Ingledew's bookshop was relatively easy
No traffic lights had to be navigated, no roads crossed. As they walked around
the huge cathedral
they could hear the deep toned notes of the organ and Charlie
thought of his father. Lyell Bone had been one of the cathedral organists until
one foggy night eight years ago, he had gotten into his car and driven over the
edge of a quarry He had never been seen again.
"I
know what you're thinking, dear boy" Paton murmured. Lyell was his nephew
and had been one of his best friends.
There was
a CLOSED sign on Ingledew's door, but a soft light in the window illuminated the
piles of ancient-looking books.
Charlie rang the doorbell. There was no answer. He pressed
the bell again. They could hear it ringing in the back of the shop, but no one
came to the door.
"Didn't you say they went out at weekends?"
said Benjamin. "They could be at a museum, or the movies, or
something."
"Of course," said Charlie. "I
forgot."
Paton snapped his book shut and stared despondently
at the window.
"I wouldn't do that if I were you, Uncle P
—" Charlie began.
But Paton's distress was too great. With a small pop
the light in the window went out, and a shower of glass settled on the antique
books.
"Darn!" muttered Paton. "She'll know it
was me."
"No, she won't," said Charlie. "Miss
Ingledew probably often has lights failing."
"Failing, yes," moaned Paton, "but not
bursting. She knows it's what I do."
"Come on, Uncle."
"Oh dear. Oh, darn. I'll never be able to face her
again," sighed Paton.
"Of course you will. Let's go home. You won't
have to read anymore because it's
dark."
"That's true!" Paton turned away from the
shop and strode toward the nearest alley
Charlie and Benjamin had to run to keep up with him,
while Runner Bean dashed ahead, hoping for a game.
They were moving rapidly down Filbert Street when
Paton said, "I don't want my sisters to hear about this little
setback."
"Why are your sisters so mean?" asked
Benjamin
"It goes back a long way" said Paton.
"They always do whatever Ezekiel Bloor
wants," said Charlie. "It's like they're afraid of him."
"They are," said Paton. "He's a cousin
and at the moment he holds the power. They admire that."
"I'm glad I haven't got any aunts," Benjamin
muttered. "I'm off now Mom and Dad are home. Bye!"
Charlie and Paton climbed the steps to number nine,
but once inside, Paton marched grimly up to his room. Charlie went into the
kitchen to give Maisie and his mother a progress report.
"How did it go?" asked Mrs. Bone. “Any
mishaps?"
"It went perfectly" lied Charlie.
"I'll go with him next time," said Maisie
happily "It'll make such a difference to poor Paton if he can go out in the daytime."
Charlie noticed that Skarpo the sorcerer had disappeared.
"Where's the painting?" he asked.
"Search me," said his mother. "Grandma
Bone must have taken it to her room."
Grandma Bone had done no such thing. When Charlie went
to bed he found Skarpo on his pillow
"OK," he said grimly "If they want me
to go in, I will, but not until I'm ready and not until I've decided how you
can help me."
Before he shut the painting in a drawer with his
socks, he took a quick look at the sorcerer. The man in black tilted his head
toward Charlie and said, "Welcome, child of the Red King!"
Charlie closed the drawer quickly He wondered how
dangerous it would be to "go in" as his uncle put it, and ask for Skarpo's help. If Henry Yewbeam was to be rescued before old Ezekiel
found him, then a bit of sorcery could come in handy
“TAKE
HIM TO THE DUNGEONS!”
Henry Yewbeam spent the rest of the weekend in Cook's
secret rooms.
"If you leave here you'll get snatched," she
warned Henry “And then where will we be? Someone in this place wants you gotten
rid of you know!"
"I bet it's Zeke," murmured Henry "He's
never forgiven me for finishing his puzzle."
"It's Ezekiel, all right," said Cook.
"There he is, a feeble old man at the end of his life, while the cousin
he thought he'd banished forever has come back as a boy with his whole life in
front of him."
Henry couldn't help grinning. "He must be in a
rage," he said.
"Yes. And we don't want him to put a stop to the
nice long life that lies ahead of you, do we?"
"No." And yet Henry found it hard to imagine
what kind of life it might be.
Cook set about preparing a meal. Mrs. Bloor would be
joining them later and Henry helped to lay three places on a small round table
in the corner.
As Cook worked she began to tell Henry her story. And Henry found himself curling up in the
armchair by the stove, and listening to one of the strangest tales he'd ever
heard.
Cook and
her younger sister, Pearl, had once lived with their parents on an island in
the north. Their father, Gregor, was a fisherman. When the girls were five and
six it became apparent that they were like lucky charms. Whenever they watched
their father set off in his little boat, he always caught more fish than he
could carry Soon people Rocked to the island to buy Gregor's fish. He became
very rich and was able to purchase the whole island. He built a grand house
with breathtaking views of the ocean, and the sea around his island was always
calm. This was because his daughters were endowed with luck and tranquillity so
it was said.
One day a
young man came to the island. "He was handsome enough," said Cook,
"but there was something about him that gave Pearl and me the creeps. It
turned out that he'd come to marry one of us. It didn't matter which. We were
fifteen and sixteen at the time, and my father said, 'Be off with you,
Grimwald' — that was his name — 'Be off with you. My daughters are too young to
marry. They want to see the world before
they settle down.' Grimwald was persistent. 'I need one of your daughters now,”
he said, 'while she's still young. I want her for her pure fresh beauty for her
sweetness and tranquillity and for the luck she will bring me.' The young man's attitude annoyed my father.
Again he refused him. And then Grimwald began to threaten us." Cook
tasted the stew she'd been cooking. "More salt," she murmured.
"Go
on," said Henry eagerly
Cook continued, "My father ordered Grimwald to
leave the island, and eventually he went, but not before he'd turned his fury
on us. “You think you control the oceans, don't you, you little minxes,' he
said. 'Well, you don't. Very soon you'll find out that my power is far greater
than yours. And then you'll come running to me, both of you, mark my words.' If
only we had believed him," Cook said sadly
“A year later, Pearl and I left our island. We
traveled all over the world. We dined and danced and met our sweethearts — both
sailors as it happened. We came home to tell our parents and found . .
."At this point Cook gave a terrible sigh and several tears dropped into
the sauce she was stirring.
"Found what?" asked Henry
"Found nothing," said Cook. All gone:
island, house, parents — all perished. Drowned by the biggest tidal wave in
history We suspected, but we couldn't be sure, and then when our sweethearts
were drowned at sea we knew It was Grimwald!"
Henry gasped. "You mean he could . . . ?"
"Oh, yes. He could do anything with water. My sister
and I parted. It was safer to travel alone. We were less recognizable. We went
underground, took work in secret, shadowy places where he couldn't find us. Wherever we went we tried to improve things,
keep children safe. One day I learned that Bloor's Academy needed a cook. I'd
heard it was where the Red King once held court, and I thought I could help
some of the children who came here. I guessed that, just like Pearl and me, if
they were endowed they wouldn't have an easy time of it." Cook licked the
spoon she'd used for stirring, grunted approvingly and put a lid on the
saucepan.
Henry would have liked her to continue but, at that
moment, Mrs. Bloor came through the little door in the corner, and Cook
declared their supper was ready
Alter supper Mrs. Bloor helped Cook to wash the dishes
and then crept away to her lonely room in the west wing.
"Mrs. Bloor is a very sad lady" Henry
remarked as he carefully placed Cook's china plates on the dresser.
"Sad indeed," sighed Cook. "If only she
could go back to the way she was before her hand was crushed."
"Perhaps the Time Twister could help?" Henry
suggested.
Cook darted a wary look at him. "People can't go
back, you know that, Henry."
"Yes,
but in her case it would only be five years. And she hasn't had a real life here. Who would
notice?"
"Hm!"
was all Cook said.
Later, as
Henry lay in bed his thoughts kept returning to the Time Twister. Cook had no
right to hide it from him. The glowing glass
fixed itself in his mind so firmly Henry couldn't sleep. He got up, threw his
blue cape over his pajamas, and tiptoed out of the tiny room where he slept.
Moonlight, striking through the skylight, lent a pearly glow to the objects in
the room beneath. The china on the dresser glimmered softly and Henry looking
up to the top shelf saw a row of china mugs They were decorated with hands of
gold and silver leaves; two of them were placed closer together than the
others, as though someone had moved one of them in haste.
Henry pulled a chair close to the dresser and climbed
onto it. He still couldn't reach the top shelf so he stepped onto the dresser
itself. Now he could touch the row of mugs. The first one he picked up was
empty. He replaced it and drew the
second mug toward him. As he lifted it off the shelf something rolled out and
dropped to the floor.
Henry looked down to see the Time Twister glowing
beneath him. He smiled with satisfaction but before he could climb off the
dresser a shadowy form ran toward the glass ball.
"No, Blessed," said Henry recognizing the
dog's dumpy shape.
Blessed took no notice. He scooped up the Time Twister
in his mouth and trotted to the door in the corner.
"NO!" Henry said. "This isn't the time
for a game, Blessed."
Blessed nosed open the door and disappeared. Henry
leaped from the dresser, knocking over the chair, but by the time he had
reached the staircase behind the door, all that could be seen of the dog was
his wagging bald tail. Henry tried to grab it and slipped off the first step.
Getting to his feet, he leaped up the steps again.
At the top of the staircase Henry found himself in a dark passage. He could hear
the tap of Blessed’s claws echoing somewhere beyond him and ran toward the
sound.
The passage curved in seemingly endless circles until
it eventually led to a low door. The door was locked. Blessed had vanished. How
could he have walked through a locked door? Henry stared at the empty passage
behind him. He noticed a thin beam of light coming from a wooden panel at the
bottom of the wall. Gently he pushed the panel with his foot. It opened like a
cat flap. Or a dog flap? If fat Blessed could get through it, so could Henry
He knelt down and crawled through the flap. On the
other side was a corridor with highly polished floorboards. Gold-framed
paintings hung on the walls and a lamp with a colored glass shade stood on a
small round table.
A little further on Henry could see a dark closet. He guessed that it hid the door Mrs. Bloor
used to visit Cook. As Henry tiptoed down the corridor he could hear a voice.
"Tell me!" it said. "Speak to me, dog!"
Henry sidled to the end of the corridor and found that
it led to the landing above the hall. On the other side of the landing, a small
boy in a blue bathrobe was talking to Blessed. He stopped talking and began to
grunt and whine like a dog. The boy had white hair and the glasses he wore made
his eyes look like round red lamps.
Henry pressed himself against the wall and watched.
The boy was having no success with his grunting dog language, so he began to
use words again.
"Tell me, you stupid dog! Speak! Why won't you
tell me where he is? Where's the boy from nowhere?"
Blessed gazed mournfully up at the boy but he refused
to speak.
"What have you got in your mouth?" asked the
boy "It's that thing, isn't it? The magic marble. Give it to me and I'll
take it to Mr. Ezekiel."
At these
words Henry froze. So the boy was working for Ezekiel. He was about to creep
away down the corridor when something happened.
"Give it to me, dog!" The white-haired boy
suddenly lifted his foot and kicked the old dog in the ribs. Again and again.
Blessed groaned and sank to his knees.
As the boy lifted his foot again, Henry cried,
"Don't!"
The boy
looked up and smiled.
"You're
him, aren't you? The one from
nowhere."
"Leave the dog alone," said Henry "He's
old. You're hurting him.
"He's
got the time thing, hasn't he?"
"Maybe,"
said Henry "Who are you?"
"I'm Billy Raven," said the boy "1 talk
to dogs. They usually answer me. I don't know what's wrong with silly old
Blessed today."
At that moment Blessed dropped the Time Twister. It
lay between the boys, glowing softly
"Don't
look at it!" Henry warned. He didn't like Billy, but the white-haired boy
was very small, and Henry didn't want him to be twisted into another century
"It's beautiful" said Billy He bent to pick
it up but Henry kicked the marble away It rolled across the landing and dropped
through the bannisters. There was a light ping as it hit the stones below:
Billy Raven glared at Henry "You shouldn't have
done that," he said.
Henry was tempted to run down and find the marble, but
the other boy was giving him such an odd sly look, he hesitated.
All at once Blessed gave a low rumbling howl.
The warning came too late.
A hand came down on Henry's shoulder and a husky voice
said, "Well, look what the dog dragged in!"
Henry tried to twist away but the hand was strong and
held him like a vice. He turned his head and looked into the long mean face of
Manfred Bloor.
"Let me go," said Henry
"You're joking," said Manfred. "Someone
wants to see you very much." He pushed Henry along the landing.
"Well done, Billy A Little present will be coming your way very
soon."
"Thanks, Manfred!" called Billy
Manfred shoved Henry into a passage leading off the landing, but Henry
continued to struggle. They reached a staircase and, at this point, Henry almost
got away but Manfred shrieked, "Zelda, where are you?" and a thin,
long-nosed girl leaped toward them. She
grabbed Henry's arm, almost wrenching it out of its socket.
Henry let out a blood-curdling yell.
"Shut up!" said Manfred. "Zelda, hold
him still."
Zelda twisted Henry's arms behind his back, and
Manfred tied his wrists together with a length of sticky tape.
"We'll need the flashlight," said Manfred.
"Where is it?"
"It's all right," said Zelda. "I
haven't forgotten it."
Grunting and struggling, Henry was led up the stairs,
along dark passages, down ancient spiraling steps and then up again and into a
part of the building he almost recognized; the place where he and James had
spent their last miserable Christmas together.
"We're not there yet!" hissed Manfred.
Up they went again. Up and up, into a shadowy world
lit by a jet of gas, whispering from the wall in their rusty iron brackets.
Henry remembered the gaslights, but the walls that had once been covered in
richly patterned paper were now stained with damp and hung with gray cobwebs.
They reached a door, its black paint scratched and
peeling. Manfred knocked.
Henry's mouth felt dry with fear and he could hear his
own heart, thumping in his chest.
"Who's there?"The voice was old and slightly
hoarse.
"It's Manfred, Grandpa. And guess who else? I've
got a lovely surprise for you!" Manfred grinned at Henry
"What?" There was a delighted shriek from
within the room. "Bring it in! Bring in my lovely surprise!"
Manfred opened the door and shoved Henry into the
room.
Henry found himself looking at the oldest man he had
ever seen. It was difficult to believe that the wizened creature in a
wheelchair had once been his cousin Zeke. And yet there was something familiar about the spiteful, hooded
eyes and thin cruel mouth/
The air in
the room was stifling. Behind the old man, logs burned in a huge fireplace. The
floor was padded with many worn carpets and the windows covered by thick velvet
curtains.
"Well," said the old man. "Well, I
never. If it isn't cousin Henry?"
Henry tried to swallow but there was a lump in his
throat. He couldn't think of anything to say
"Come
closer," said Ezekiel.
Manfred and Zelda gave Henry another push. He staggered forward feeling
faint. The old man was draped in blankets. How could he stand the heat?
"My my! You are young, aren't you?" Ezekiel
said resentfully.
Henry tried to clear his throat. "I'm
eleven," he croaked. "At least I was last week."
Ezekiel scowled. "Last week. You mean ninety
years ago, don't you?"
"Not quite," said Henry feeling bolder.
"Not by my reckoning."
"Ooo! 'Not by my reckoning,'" the old man
mimicked. "Always were the clever one, weren't you? Well you're not so
clever now. Got yourself caught, haven't
you?"
Henry nodded.
"So where have you been hiding?"
Desperately Henry tried to think of an answer. He knew he mustn't give
Cook away "In a closet."
"In a closet? Where?"
"In the kitchen," said Henry "No one
saw me. I came out at night for food."
The old man sniggered. "This time you came out
too far, didn't you?"
"Yes," said Henry meekly
"What are you going to do with him,
Grandpa?" asked Manfred.
"Put him in the attic," Zelda suggested.
"With the rats and bats." She cackled gleefully
The old man stroked his stubbly white chin. "Hm. Where's the Time Twister?" he demanded.
"I don't know The dog had it."
"Did
he now? He's a good doggie — bringing his old master another present. He was
very scared of that Twister, you know" Ezekiel's smile was worse than his
scowl. He had very few teeth and those that remained were chipped and black.
Henry
figured that Blessed had just wanted a game but he decided to let Ezekiel think
what he wanted.
"So, where's my doggie, now?" asked the old
man.
"Had a bit of trouble there," said Manfred.
"Billy Raven kicked the dog and he dropped the marble."
"Kicked?"
shouted Ezekiel. "Kicked my dog? The wretch. So why didn't you get the
Twister, you nincompoop?"
Manfred sucked his teeth and answered curtly
"You wanted the boy so we brought the boy
Billy will find
the marble."
"Bah!" the old man spat into the grate.
"He'd
better bring it soon."
"So, is it to be the attic for this one,
sir?" asked Zelda. "Until you can send him off again."
"No! There's too much going on up there. Take him
to the dungeons." Ezekiel swung his chair away turning his back on Henry
Henry shuddered. "Couldn't I stay here? I
wouldn't be any trouble. 1 could live with Charlie Bone. He . . ."
"Stay?" screeched Ezekiel. "Never in a
thousand years. Get him away from me. Now! I can't stand the sight of him, all
young and hopeful. Get him OUT!"
Henry was tugged away "Please!" he cried.
"Don't do this."
Manfred and Zelda pulled him out into the passage and
slammed the door. While Zelda held him still, Manfred covered his mouth with a
thick piece of sticky tape, and then Henry was dragged and bundled down to the
hall and out into the freezing night. The cold hit him with such force he gave
up struggling and allowed his two captors to lead him across the frozen ground.
The icy stars above them gave the world a strange,
pale glow but the moon had disappeared. Zelda’s flashlight threw a narrow path
of light across the patches of snow and although Henry could hardly see a
thing in front of him, he knew where they must be heading. It was still a
shock, though, when the great walls of the ruined castle loomed before him.
He was pushed through the archway and then into one of
the passages leading out of the courtyard. Unlike the passage he had entered
yesterday this one seemed to be leading downward. The ground was wet with
mildew; and every now and again Henry found himself skidding into Zelda, who
led the way
"Stop that," she snarled, "or I'll drag
you there on your bottom."
Where was there? Henry wondered.
Deeper they went. Deeper and deeper. The air was so
thick and musty Henry began to choke. The tape over his mouth made it difficult
to breathe. Just when he thought he might die of suffocation they emerged onto
a grassy bank. Tall trees reached into the night sky rustling softly
"Go on!" said Manfred, giving Henry a shove.
Henry tumbled down the bank while the others ran after
him, giggling spitefully
They hauled him upright and marched him over to a
black rock, half-hidden in the undergrowth.
"OK, Zelda. Get to work," said Manfred.
Zelda gave a crooked smile. She stared at the rock. In
the dim light, Henry saw her smile become a terrible grimace as, very slowly
the rock began to move. Zelda was obviously one of the endowed. No ordinary
person could have done that. With a rough, grating sound the rock slid back, revealing
a round black pit.
Before Henry knew what had happened, Manfred had
pushed him to the edge.
"Go on," said Manfred. "Down!"
"Mm mm!" Henry shook his head.
"Oh, yes you wall." Manfred gave him a thump
on the back, and Henry tottered forward onto a narrow stone step.
"DOWN!" ordered Manfred, this time pushing
Henry's head.
Henry bumped and slithered down a flight of steps,
desperately trying to free his hands. Painfully he ripped one free of the tape
and groped for something to stop his fall. At last he touched an iron ring
driven into the side of the pit, and clung to it. But even as he started to climb back up
the steps, the huge rock crunched across the top of the pit. Henry was plunged
into a darkness so deep and dreadful he fell he must be dead.
Roused from sleep by a noise from the next room, Cook
had found the empty mug and the upturned chair. She guessed what had happened.
The flame cats were already scratching at her skylight. As soon as she let them
in, they sped across the room and up the hidden staircase. They knew when a
child was in trouble. But by the time the cats reached the landing, Henry
Yewbeam had gone and they found Billy Raven peering over the railings. As soon
as he saw them he ran back to bed.
The cats found Blessed, lying on his side and
breathing heavily. Gently they nudged
the old dog to his feet, and then, with soft, encouraging voices they eased his
pain and kept up his spirits until he reached the place he called home. Now he
lay at Cook's feet, wrapped in a blanket and half-asleep.
"Poor dog, you paid dearly for keeping my secret,
didn't you," Cook murmured. "Thanks to you, he'll live," she
told the cats. "But somewhere in this godforsaken place, there's a poor
boy who may not last the night." She buried her face in her hands.
"Oh, Henry you foolish boy where are you?"
Aries couldn't bear the sound of weeping. With a
gentle meow he stood up and patted Cook's knee.
Cook wiped her eyes. "You're right. This won't
help will it? You'd better go and look for him, my dears."
She opened the skylight and the three flames leaped
out into the dark. It did her heart good to see their bright forms streak into
the night.
"What's become of the Twister, I'd like to know,"
Cook said to herself. "Has that wretched Billy Raven found it?" As
she closed the skylight she heard the distant chimes of the cathedral clock
strike midnight.
Billy Raven was fast asleep in bed. Down in the hall, the Time Twister still
glimmered in a corner. The door to the west wing stood slightly open, and now a figure emerged. Keeping to the
shadows, the dark form slowly circled the hall until it reached the marble.
The glowing glass sphere was lifted out of its corner and slipped into a deep
pocket.
EZEKIEL’S
VISITORS
On Monday morning Olivia Vertigo's famous film star
mother had to be at work very early; so Olivia was dropped off at the academy
long before her friends. She was surprised to find the hall full of people.
Cleaners with mops and brooms were sweeping in corners; Dr. Saltweather and
some of the stronger teachers were moving furniture away from the walls; others
were peering under the long tapestries and heavy curtains.
"Don't just stand there, girl, do
something!" Dr. Bloor shouted from his seat in the middle of the hall.
Olivia wasn't sure what she should do. “Are you
looking for something, sir?" she asked.
"Of course we are. A marble. A most particular
marble. Get on with it."
"Yes, sir." Olivia dumped her bag by the
door and wandered around the hall. She kept her eyes trained on the ground but
there was hardly a speck of dust to be seen.
After an
hour of fruitless searching, Dr. Bloor ordered the furniture moved back and the
hall cleared "It's not here," he muttered. "So who's got
it?"
Olivia
heard voices in the courtyard behind her and, picking up her bag, ran out to
see if she could catch Charlie before he went into assembly. She
found him coming up the steps with Fidelio. They were talking about a pets' café.
"Hi,
you two!" said Olivia. "I've got news."
"Look
out, vegetable," said Damian Smerk, almost knocking her off the steps.
Damian was a bit of a bully particularly where girls were concerned.
Olivia
wasn't afraid of him. "I'd rather have green hair than a face like
yours," she retorted, patting her freshly dyed spinach-colored
hair.
"Weirdo!"
grunted Damian, marching off
Fidelio made a face at Damian's back. "What's the
news, then?" he asked.
Olivia
told them about the search for the marble.
“It
must be
that thing that brought your cousin here," she said to Charlie. "You
know, the Time Twister."
While the boys stared at her, she took a breath and
went on, "I met him by the way"
"You met Henry?" said Charlie.
"Yes, in the ruin. Manfred and Asa were looking
for him. He said he'd been hiding in the kitchen, so Bindi and I took him back
there before those two could catch him."
"Well done," said Charlie.
At that moment, Emma Tolly came up the steps and
Olivia turned to follow her.
"Emma, stop," called Olivia. "I want to
. . ."
But Emma had already gone into the hall where talking
was forbidden.
"I don't know what's the matter with her,"
sighed Olivia. "She doesn't seem to want to be friends any more."
"Maybe you're too weird for her," joked
Charlie. "Look who's talking!" Olivia grinned and bounced up the steps into the hall.
Charlie and Fidelio made their way to the blue
coatroom where they found Gabriel sitting on a bench. He was holding the bag of
Asa's old clothes and he looked worried.
"What's up?" asked Fidelio. "Has Asa
been after you?"
"I reckon he has," muttered
Gabriel. "Something attacked our goats last
night."
Charlie sat beside Gabriel. "None of them were killed, were they?" he
asked gently
"No,
they were just scared, and they wouldn't be milked this morning." Gabriel
sighed. "1 think I ought to give this stuff back,
but I don't know how to. Asa might get nasty"
"Give it to Olivia," Fidelio suggested.
"She can slip it into the drama coatroom during break."
"OK." Gabriel pushed the bag under the bench
and followed the other two into assembly
After assembly Charlie dragged himself off to his music
lesson with Mr. Paltry—Winds. The old music teacher had decided to let him try
the trumpet instead of the recorder, and Charlie liked this much better. His
lesson was almost enjoyable.
At break he found Gabriel and Fidelio wandering around
the field. Gabriel still looked worried. He told Charlie he'd given Asa's
clothes to Olivia and, as far as he knew, she had managed to hang the bag on
Asa's peg.
"So, everything's OK," said Charlie.
"Not exactly When I went for my piano lesson, Mr.
Pilgrim wasn't there."
Fidelio reminded Gabriel that Mr. Pilgrim had a
terrible memory. He was always
forgetting things.
"Not lessons," murmured Gabriel.
Olivia strode up, wearing a big smile.
"Done," she declared. "I put the bag on Asa's peg, but guess
what?"
"What?" asked the boys.
“Asa came in just a second after I'd done it and he
looked a real mess. He's got bandages on his hands and he was limping."
This didn't surprise the boys. Charlie told Olivia
about the Pets' Café, and Asa being chased by a pack of dogs. Olivia found this
so funny she had a fit of giggles that turned into hiccups.
When
Fidelio and Charlie went to English, Olivia, still hiccuping, went to
recitation. Gabriel was sup posed to have mathematics but he was feeling rather
odd. He wasn't wearing any secondhand clothes so he didn't understand why he
had butterflies in his stomach and a tingle creeping up the back of his head.
Before he knew it he was in the west wing and climbing the stairs to the top of
the tower. The sound of a piano began to echo down the stairwell. Mr. Pilgrim was evidently back in his room.
When Gabriel reached the top of the tower he knocked on Mr. Pilgrim's door.
There was no answer. The piano music swelled and bass chords thundered out a finale.
In the silence that followed, Gabriel opened the door. Mr. Pilgrim stared at
him over the gleaming black piano.
"Excuse me, sir," said Gabriel. "But
you weren't here before, so I . . . um ...
I missed my lesson, and I wondered if I could have it now?"
"Now?" said Mr. Pilgrim, looking puzzled.
"Yes. Please, sir."
"Now. Yes." Mr. Pilgrim moved up the piano
stool to make way for Gabriel.
"Thank you, sir." Gabriel sat next to the
piano teacher and, without waiting for instructions, launched himself into his
scales.
When the scales were finished, Mr. Pilgrim made no
comment. He sat patiently listening to Gabriel as he played two complicated
Bach figures.
Toward the end of the second piece Gabriel felt a
strange tension in the room. He came to the end of the piece and rested his
hands on his knees, waiting for Mr. Pilgrim's remarks. Sometimes, the teacher
said nothing at all.
From outside came the chimes of the cathedral clock as
it began to strike twelve.
"I'd better go, sir," said Gabriel.
"You played very well today" said Mr.
Pilgrim.
"Thank you, sir."
Gabriel was about to get up when Mr. Pilgrim said
"Gabriel, they have the boy!" "What boy sir?" "The one
that was here."
Gabriel suddenly realized who Mr. Pilgrim was talking
about. "Do you mean Henry sir? Charlie Bone’s cousin?"
Mr. Pilgrim frowned. "Henry? They took him,
Gabriel. He needs help."
"Yes, sir." Gabriel stood up. As he turned
away Mr. Pilgrim caught his arm.
"Wait." The music teacher took something out
of his pocket and pressed it into Gabriel's hand.
Gabriel could feel it was a large glass marble. It
held a strange glow that cast reflections through his closed fingers.
"Take it," said Mr. Pilgrim. "You can
go now."
"Yes, sir." Gabriel left the room. When he
was halfway down the stairs, he sat on a step. He wasn't sure what to do. If Mr.
Pilgrim was right, then Henry had been caught. The Bloors were searching for
this marble — the Time Twister. Did they mean to send Henry back to a time
where he couldn't survive?
Gabriel slowly opened his fist. He glanced at the
swirling shapes and colors, and then closed his fingers over the glimmering
ball. "Better not look," he murmured, remembering what had happened
to Henry
A movement caught his eye and he looked down into the
shadowy stairwell. Mrs. Bloor's pale face came into view. She smiled up at him.
"You played beautifully today." she said.
"Thanks." Gabriel stood clutching the Time
Twister behind his back.
Mrs. Bloor walked toward him, a curious look on her
face. "What do you have there, Gabriel?"
Gabriel slowly held out his hand, revealing the
dazzling colors of the Time Twister.
"You're not supposed to look at it," warned
Gabriel.
"Quite right," said Mrs. Bloor as she
reached for the marble. "You shouldn't have this. It's too
dangerous."
Her fingers wrapped around the marble and it disappeared
into her pocket.
"It's a Time Twister," Gabriel said quietly
"It can take you back to how you were before."
"I know" She lowered her voice. "Cook
told me. I thank you, Gabriel, from the
bottom of my heart."
Her slight black figure whisked away so quickly
Gabriel hardly saw where she went. He felt a lot better and ran lightly down to
the bottom of the tower
"You're late," said Fidelio, as Gabriel put
his plate of chips on the cafeteria table.
Gabriel looked over his shoulder. The noise in the
cafeteria was loud enough to drown his voice, but he had to be sure no one was
listening. He sat between Charlie and Fidelio and, leaning forward, said,
"They've got Henry!"
"What!" cried Charlie.
"Shhh!" Gabriel looked around the room. No
one was paying them any attention. "Mr. Pilgrim told me. I don't know how he knew"
"He's so peculiar he could say anything,"
said Fidelio.
"He seemed very sure," said Gabriel.
"Cook will know" Charlie stood up.
"I'll take my plate into the kitchen and see if I can find her."
"Better go now," advised Fidelio.
"There's a crowd around the counter, so no one will notice you."
Charlie walked toward the counter, and then quickly
sneaked through the kitchen door.
It was very steamy in the kitchen and he kept walking
into busy lunch ladies carrying pans of hot food and piles of plates. "You
shouldn't be in here," one of them said sharply
Charlie scurried to the back of the room where he found
Cook. She was sitting with a bowl on her lap, peeling carrots. Her eyes were
red and she looked very unhappy When she saw Charlie she shook her head.
"Is it true?" Charlie whispered. "Have
they caught Henry?"
"It's true, Charlie," said Cook.
"They've got him. How did you find out?"
"Mr. Pilgrim told Gabriel."
"Mr. Pilgrim?" Cook looked puzzled.
"That's strange. But who knows
these days."
"Do you know where they took him?" asked
Charlie.
"I can't be sure. But sometime after midnight I
saw Zelda
and Manfred come through the garden door."
"That means he's in the castle."
"I
wouldn't be surprised." Cook shook her head again. "There's some nasty
dungeons in that place, but the ruin is so big 1 wouldn't know where to start
looking. Mind you, the cats probably know where he is. They'll take care of
him."
"What can they do if Henry's locked up?"
said Charlie. "I've got to get him out, Cook."
"Someone
must, that's for sure. You'd better get back now; Charlie. We'll think of
something. We mustn't give up hope."
Charlie
had no intention of giving up hope. He
sneaked back into the cafeteria, took a cookie from the counter, and joined his
friends at their table.
"It's true," Charlie told them. "Cook
thinks he's in the dungeons."
"Then we'll get him out," said Fidelio
confidently
"We've got to find him first," Gabriel
reminded them.
"Come on, let's start now," said Fidelio.
"We've got half an hour before the next lesson."
They stacked their plates and went out into the
garden. The snow had melted and the sun shone down from a bright blue sky It
all looked very promising — until they reached the ruin.
When they went through the great arch, they found Mr.
Weedon in the courtyard. He was nailing several thick planks across the
entrance to one of the five passages.
"Buzz off Charlie Bone," said the gardener.
"I'm busy."
"We won't get in your way" said Charlie.
"I said buzz off," shouted Mr. Weedon.
"The place is getting dangerous. Why do you think I'm doing this?"
They had a very good idea why Mr. Weedon was blocking
an entrance into the ruin. They left the courtyard quickly
"That's obviously the way to the dungeons,"
said Gabriel. "Now what are we going to do?"
The three friends walked around the field in gloomy
silence. Olivia came running up and asked why they looked so miserable. When
she heard about Henruy she was stunned.
"That's awful. How are we going to rescue
him?"
"We don't know yet," said Gabriel.
Charlie found it difficult to concentrate on any of
his lessons. Teachers shouted at him and badgered him. Twice he went to the
wrong classroom. If Fidelio hadn't kept an eye on him, he would have been sent
to the head boy and that was something he definitely wanted to avoid.
There was a very bad atmosphere in the King's room
that night. Lysander stared gloomily at his books, Bindi had a terrible cold,
Emma worked away, silent and studious, and Asa grunted and fussed whenever he
had to turn a page with his bandaged hand.
Tancred's empty chair seemed to hold a huge emptiness
that kept drawing attention to itself, almost as if a ghost were sitting there.
The only happy person in the room was Zelda, who kept
whisking everyone's books across the table. When she stared at Tancred's chair
it whizzed around in circles, until even Manfred lost his temper.
"Stop doing that," he snarled at Zelda.
"It's not clever. It's just stupid."
"It's called telekinesis!" Zelda retorted.
"If you don't mind, darling!"
"I don't care what it is," barked Manfred.
"It's getting on my nerves. So shove it."
Zelda made a face and went back to her homework.
Charlie would have found this funny if he hadn't been
so worried. The minutes ticked by so slowly he was sure someone had tampered
with the clocks. He looked at the painting of the Red King, hanging above
Tancred's chair. What would you have
done? Thought Charlie.
The mysterious dark eyes gazed out at him. The circlet on the king's head glittered as if it were real gold.
Shadows moved in the folds of the deep red cloak. Then unbelievably the
tall figure began to change shape and color, until Charlie became convinced he was looking at a red and gold
tree. Why can't I hear
him? he wondered. He closed his
eyes. When he opened them again, the tree had gone. My mind's playing tricks,
he
thought.
By the time eight o'clock came around, Charlie could
hardly contain himself He rushed out of the King's room with Gabriel loping
behind him.
"Have you thought of something?" Gabriel
whispered as they hurried up to the dormitory
"I haven't got a real plan," Charlie
admitted, "but I'm going to the ruin tonight, whatever happens."
"I'll come with you."
"No," said Charlie. "It's best if only
one of us goes. You can keep an eye on things in the dormitory."
"I don't like it," said Gabriel. “Anything
could happen out there."
“Asa's injured. He won't be so dangerous."
Charlie sounded a lot more confident than he felt.
When Fidelio heard Charlie's plan, naturally he wanted
to go with him.
"No," said Charlie. "Two of us will
attract attention. I think I should go on my own. Henry's my relation."
Billy Raven came into the dormitory and watched the
three boys sitting on Charlie's bed.
"You look as if you're plotting something,"
said Billy
"We're plotting your downfall," Fidelio told
him.
Billy scowled. "You think you're so clever,
Fidelio Gunn."
The dormitory began to fill up with boys getting ready
for bed and the three friends said no more to one another.
When the cathedral clock struck eleven, Charlie put
his blue cape over his bathrobe, and slipped on his socks and shoes. Tiptoeing
in heavy shoes wasn't easy, but Charlie managed to creep out of the dormitory
without making too much noise. He was beginning to feel rather excited about
the adventure ahead. He was certain that he would eventually find Henry And then he turned a
corner and walked straight into Lucretia Yewbeam.
"Where are you going?" the matron demanded.
"I think I was sleepwalking," said Charlie.
"Rubbish. What's that you've got?"
"Nothing." Charlie held Cook's flashlight
behind his back.
"Give it to me. Now!"
Charlie reluctantly handed over the flashlight.
"Hm, interesting," Lucretia turned the
flashlight over in her hand. "Where did you get it?"
"I found it at home."
"Did you now? Well, it's confiscated. Go back to
bed."
"But I can't see without my flashlight."
"Then, sleepwalk. Go on!"
Charlie turned back and felt his way along the dark
passages. He had almost reached his dormitory door when he fell over something
and crashed onto the floorboards. Picking himself up, Charlie groped in the
darkness until he found what had tripped him up. A body lay sprawled across the
passage.
Whoever it was, lying so still, had a mop of hair and
seemed to be a bit taller than Charlie.
"Fidelio," breathed Charlie. "Fidelio,
wake up!"
Charlie tapped his friend's cold forehead and shook
his arm, gently at first and then desperately "Wake up! Wake up!"
The body didn't stir.
Charlie ran into the dormitory and found Gabriel's
bed.
"Gabriel," he whispered harshly
"Gabriel, help me!"
Gabriel grunted and sat up. "What's going
on?"
"Fidelio's lying in the passage," said
Charlie. "I can't wake him up."
Gabriel grabbed his flashlight, swung his feet to the
floor, and followed Charlie into the passage. Between them they managed to lift
Fidelio and carry him back to his bed. Fidelio slept on. He was limp and cold
and barely breathing. Gabriel shone his flashlight on Fidelio's face. His eyes
were wide open but they stared out with a blank, fixed expression.
"He's been hypnotized," gasped Charlie.
"We can't leave him like this till morning, he may never wake up."
Gabriel went to the bathroom and came back with a mug
of cold water. "Sorry about this," he said under his breath. He
poured the water over Fidelio's head.
With a shiver and a moan, Fidelio opened his eyes even
wider and looked up at Charlie. "What happened?" he said.
“You tell us," said Charlie. "I found you in
the passage."
"I tried to follow you," mumbled Fidelio.
"Manfred caught me. He held a flashlight up to his face. And made me look
at him. His eyes were horrible — like coal, black and shiny"
"You were hypnotized," said Charlie.
"Do you feel OK now?"
"Sleepy Got to get some sleep."
"Me, too," said Gabriel. "Night, you
two."
Charlie got into bed. He took a long time drifting off
to sleep. He was worried. Now even his friends were being watched. Someone was
determined to stop him from rescuing Henry.
At the other end of the dormitory Billy Raven lay wide
awake. When he was quite sure that everyone else was asleep, he got out of bed.
it was time to see Mr. Ezekiel. He knew it was no use waiting for Blessed. The
old dog was an enemy now and Billy was a little sorry about this. "Couldn't
be helped," he muttered, wrapping himself in his new blue bathrobe.
The powerful beam from his new flashlight helped him
to find his way quickly through the building, but once he was in the gaslit
passages of the west wing, Billy turned off his flashlight. Almost as soon as
he did this, he tripped over an empty jam jar. Something else lived in
Ezekiel's shadowy regions, and occasionally it threw jam jars down the rickety
steps that led to the attic. Billy wasn't sure if it was a ghost, or something
worse. He ran toward Ezekiel's room, but as he approached it, he heard several
angry shouts. Billy put his ear to the door.
"Someone's hiding it!" screeched Ezekiel.
"One of those wretched children."
"The children were all at home," said a
voice, "except for Billy of course."
Billy stiffened. He recognized the voice of Miss
Yewbeam, the matron.
"I want it," growled the old man. "I
must have it."
"Calm down, Ezekiel. There are other ways of
getting rid of the boy"
"Has Charlie got the painting?"
"Oh, yes," said the matron. "We made
sure of that."
"You think he'll be tempted to go in?"
Ezekiel's voice had turned sly and eager.
"I'm sure of it. But who knows if he'll fetch the
dagger."
"Of course he will," said Ezekiel. “Any boy
would choose a dagger; all sharp and shiny."
"We had a bit of trouble with Paton," said
Lucretia. "I think he knows more than he should."
"You'll have to do something about that brother
of yours. He reads too much."
The matron gave a nasty laugh. "Oh, yes, he
reads," she sniggered. “And that will be his downfall. Leave it to
us."
Miss Yewbeam's laugh was infectious and soon they were
both swept into a bout of unrestrained giggling.
Billy chose this moment to knock.
"Who is it?" said Ezekiel, still chuckling.
"Billy Raven, sir," said Billy
"Ah, I want a word with you," said Ezekiel.
Billy entered the room. He was feeling hopeful. Surely
he was due for a reward. He was in for a nasty shock.
When the old man saw Billy he screamed, "You
wretch. You kicked my doggie."
"But I helped to catch the boy from
nowhere," said Billy taken aback.
Ezekiel ignored this. "Why did you kick my
Percy?"
"He wouldn't talk to me." Billy was
beginning to lose hope. "When am I going to get new parents,
sir?"
"You don't hurt my doggie. No parents for you. You'll have to do better. Now get out!"
As Billy turned to go he saw a look of scorn cross
Matron Yewbeam's face. It was quite obvious that she didn't like children one
bit.
RUN
OVER!
Charlie couldn't remember when he'd had such a
horrible week.
It took Fidelio several days to recover from being
hypnotized. He wandered along beside Charlie, hardly talking. Sometimes he
forgot Charlie's name, and sometimes even his own.
During the day it was impossible to get into the ruin
because Mr. Weedon was always there.
"Clear out!" the gardener would shout.
"Go on. Buzz off!"
At night, whenever Charlie tried to leave the dormitory
Lucretia Yewbeam was always lurking around a corner, ready to pounce on him. In
the end he just gave up. But Henry was on his mind all the time. Where was he?
Was he being starved to death?
It suddenly dawned on Charlie that Henry had no
parents to come looking for him. No one would miss him because he shouldn't
really exist. There was Cook, of course, and Mrs. Bloor. But what could they
do, and who would believe poor Mrs. Bloor?
"It's up to me," Charlie murmured.
"What's up to you?" asked Fidelio.
It was Friday afternoon and they were packing their
bags, ready to go home.
Charlie looked up. "Fidelio, that's the first
sensible thing you've said all week. Are you feeling better?"
Fidelio nodded, "It's wearing off. But I've still
got a headache. I'd like to give Manfred a taste of his own medicine."
"One day we'll get our own back," muttered
Gabriel.
Billy Raven came in and Fidelio whispered, "It's
all his fault. He's a spy."
But Charlie felt almost sorry for Billy he looked so
lonely and fed up.
"Don't be deceived," Fidelio muttered.
"He's still dangerous."
The three boys ran down to the hall and out through
the great oak doors.
“Another weekend of freedom!" cried Gabriel.
"Gerbils, here I come!"
They leaped on the blue school bus and were soon on
the move. Filbert Street was one of the last stops and Charlie could hardly
wait to get home. He wanted to ask his uncle what to do about Henry
As soon as Charlie got off the bus he saw Benjamin and
Runner Bean racing toward him. From the look on Benjamin's face, Charlie knew
that something was wrong.
"What's happened?" he asked when Benjamin
stood panting beside him.
"Oh, Charlie, it's awful. Your uncle was run
over!"
"What?" Charlie dropped his bag. "When?
How? Is he . . . ?"
"No, he's not dead." Benjamin paused to get
his breath back. "He's in the hospital. It was up near the
cathedral," Benjamin panted. "Someone saw your uncle step into the
road while he was reading a book. A car came around the corner and went
straight into him. It didn't stop, it just sped off."
"No," Charlie moaned. "I was afraid this would
happen."
When they reached number nine, Benjamin didn't come in with Charlie.
"You'll want to be alone with your family" he said. "I expect they'll be going to the
hospital."
Maisie opened the door and squeezed Charlie with a
violent hug. "Oh, Charlie," she cried. "What a catastrophe. Did
Benjamin tell you?"
"Yes." Charlie twisted himself out of
Maisie's arms "Is Uncle Paton . . . ? Is he OK? I mean, is he
talking?"
"He wasn't yesterday" said Maisie. "His
head was all wrapped up and so were his ribs. Poor Paton. He looked awful."
"Do they know who did it?"
"Hit and run," said Maisie grimly
"There were a couple of witnesses, but they didn't get the number. The
car just raced away."
Maisie led Charlie into the kitchen where his mother
was laying three places at the table.
"We're going to see your uncle later," she
said, pecking Charlie's cheek. "Do you want to come, Charlie?"
"You bet," said Charlie.
After tea they took a taxi up to the hospital It was a
large building and they spent a long time looking for the right ward. As they
walked down the long aisle between the rows of beds, they recognized two people
sitting beside one of the patients: Emma and Miss Ingledew.
"I'd like to give that woman a piece of my
mind," Maisie muttered. "It's all her fault. She's been horrible to
Paton."
When it came to it, Maisie couldn't say a word, because
as soon as she saw them, Mss Ingledew jumped up and said in a tearful voice,
"I'm so, so sorry for what's happened. I blame myself entirely Paton was
coming to see me, and I. . . Oh, he shouldn't have put himself at risk like
that. I feel so guilty." She blew her nose very loudly.
"It's not your fault, Julia," said Amy Bone,
putting an arm around her shoulders. "Paton was just trying out a little
experiment. One of us should have been with him, but he just slipped out
without our knowing."
All that could be seen of Paton was his white face. He
had a black mask over his eyes and a bandage around his head.
"Is he conscious?" Charlie asked in a
whisper.
"Yes," said a thin voice that was still
unmistakably Paton's.
Charlie bent closer to his uncle. "How do you
feel, Uncle Paton?" he asked. "You are going to get better, aren't
you?"
"Of course." His voice dropped to a whisper.
"It was one of them, Charlie."
"One of who?"
"My sisters. She was wearing a wig. I can't tell
them apart without seeing the hair, but I know"
Charlie was so shocked he sat down heavily on the side
of the bed.
Miss Ingledew got up to leave, but before she went she
handed Charlie a small, battered-looking book. "I found it in the gutter
after your uncle's accident," she said. "He asked me to give it to
you. That's right, isn't it, Paton?"
"Yes," he said weakly
"Good-bye, Paton dear. I'll be back tomorrow."
As Miss Ingledew turned away Paton gave a very slight
smile.
Emma came around to Charlie's side of the bed and
said, "I'm sorry Charlie. I haven't been very nice just lately. But I want to help."
"OK," said Charlie awkwardly
"I mean, I will help."
"Thanks," he said. "See you on
Monday"
Emma could fly and that could be useful.
Miss Ingledew and her niece walked away and Maisie
began to tell Paton all the news she could remember, both public and personal.
While she talked, Charlie looked at the small brown book. The name Geiriadur was printed in faded gold on the cover. Inside there
were columns of words in a strange language.
After a while Paton gave a huge yawn and murmured,
"I'm wearing the mask because of the lights. I told them they hurt my eyes. It could've
been nasty.”
"It certainly could," said Mrs. Bone, gazing
up at the
rows of
fluorescent lights.
"Good night, everyone," said Paton with
another yawn.
Taking the
hint, Mrs. Bone and Maisie got up to leave, but leaning closer to his uncle,
Charlie said, "Uncle Paton, the book's in a foreign language."
"Welsh," muttered Paton. "You'll need
it for Skarpo.”
"Why?"
Paton didn't answer. He merely said, "Keep it safe.”
Charlie
wanted to ask his uncle's advice about Henry but he didn't see how he could
while Paton was so ill.
A nurse
appeared with a cart full of pills and, promising to return next day the three
visitors said good night to Paton and left the hospital.
At number nine they found Grandma Bone in the kitchen
eating cake.
"You haven't been to see Paton," Maisie said
accusingly.
"I've been busy," grunted Grandma Bone.
"Grizelda! Your own brother!" Maisie turned
away in disgust. "You've got a
heart of stone."
Grandma Bone ignored her. She took a large bite of
cream cake and then noticed the book Charlie was holding.
"What's that you've got?" She stared at
Charlie's hand.
A book," said Charlie.
"I can see that," she said irritably
"What sort of book? Give it here." "No. It's private."
Charlie ran upstairs. He didn't trust Grandma Bone.
She was bound to come snooping in his room as soon as she got the chance. He
found that the book just fit into his pants pocket. He would keep it with him
wherever he went. Tomorrow they would pay another visit to the hospital and he
could have a private chat with his uncle.
It was not to be. Next day when Charlie asked to visit
the hospital, Maisie looked glum. "Grandma Bone and the Yewbeams are going
today" she said. “And I’m not traveling up there in Eustacia's car. She
drives like a maniac."
"What about Mom?" asked Charlie.
"She can't get away from work until after
visiting hours."
Charlie
didn't know what to do. At length he decided he must see his uncle, so at three
o'clock when Eustacia's black car pulled up outside number nine Charlie got in
the back with Grandma Bone. Aunt Venetia was in the passenger seat.
"What a treat," exclaimed Aunt Venetia.
"We're going to have little Charlie with us."
"Not
little, if you don't mind," muttered Charlie.
"Sensitive
about our size, are we?" Venetia giggled.
Charlie
didn't think there was any point in replying
As soon as
they reached Paton's ward, Charlie realized that any conversation with his
uncle would be impossible. When Paton heard his sisters' voices his face took
on a blank, shuttered look, and he refused to speak.
"He doesn't appear to be conscious," said
Grandma Bone. She raised her voice, "Paton, it's US. Your SISTERS. Aren't
you going to talk to us?"
Paton's face remained blank.
"We've bought grapes," said Eustacia,
plonking a bag on the bedside table.
“And Charlie's here," added Venetia.
Paton gave no sign that he'd heard them. Charlie
didn't blame him. The three sisters sat around the bed discussing the weather
and the national news as if their brother were not there.
After half an hour they stood up, and Charlie took his
chance. Leaning over his uncle, he whispered. "See you next weekend, Uncle
P"
"You're on," murmured Paton.
"He spoke!" cried Venetia. "Charlie,
what did he say?"
"Nothing,"
said Charlie. "He was just breathing."
They
frowned at him suspiciously On the drive back to Filbert Street, the three
sisters ignored Charlie and chattered away to one another. He had never known
Grandma Bone to be in such a good mood, but then poor Henry had been caught and
was probably locked up in some dark, secret place. No wonder the Yewbeams were
happy
By the
time he got home, Charlie was desperate to discuss Henry with someone. He
decided to have a talk with his mother.
When Mrs. Bone got home, Charlie followed her
to her
small room at the back of the house.
"I've
got a problem, Mom," he said. "Can we talk?"
"Charlie,
of course."
Mrs. Bone took a bundle of clothes out of the armchair
and made Charlie snuggle into it. Then she swung another chair around so that
she could sit close to him.
Charlie's
mom was a very good listener. She never interrupted or exclaimed, but when she
heard the extraordinary story of Henry Yewbeam, her eyes widened and her
expression changed from curiosity to amazement and then horror.
"That poor boy," she said when Charlie had
told her everything. "What can we do? And Paton — his own sisters! But I
suppose that shouldn't surprise me."
"Why Mom?" asked Charlie.
"Because of your father. I know they had something
to do with his accident. And Grandma Bone, removing all his photos. As if he
didn't exist."
"One day he will exist, Mom," said Charlie.
She shook her head and smiled sadly "I'm afraid
not, Charlie. But I've had an idea. Miss Ingledew knows something about the
little book. She found it, and she was talking to Paton before we got to the
hospital. Why don't you go and see her?"
Charlie thought this was a very good idea. "I'll
take Benjamin," he said. “And Runner Bean." He didn't like to admit
it to his mother, but he always felt nervous in the narrow streets around the
cathedral.
Benjamin was, as always, very happy to join Charlie on
an expedition. So was Runner Bean. On Sunday afternoon, all three set off for
Ingledew's bookshop while Grandma Bone was taking a nap.
Dark clouds hung over the city and there was still a
hint of snow in the air. By the time they reached the bookshop, the boys were
ready for a hot drink and a bite to eat.
"I hope they're in," Benjamin muttered as
Charlie rang the bell.
They were in luck. Emma answered the door.
"Come in," she said with a bright smile.
"But excuse the mess."
She led
them into the cozy room behind the shop A large sketchbook lay on Miss
Ingledew's desk Emma had apparently been working there. The drawing of a huge
bird covered both pages of the open book. It looked like a golden eagle and yet
there was something far more menacing and powerful about it.
Apart from Miss Ingledew's piles of books the room
seemed to be full of feathers. Black, white, blue, and gray they covered the
floor and lay on every table and chair in the room.
"I've been copying them," said Emma,
sweeping a pile of feathers off the sofa. "Watch where you sit."
The boys perched on the sofa where there were less
feathers than anywhere else. Runner Bean was confused. He started hunting for
the birds that must surely be hiding somewhere in the room.
"What's that?" asked Charlie, nodding at
Emma's drawing.
A tollroc," she said.
"Never heard of it," said Charlie.
"No, you wouldn't have. I invented it." Emma
held up the book. "It's supposed to be like the 'roc in "Sinbad the
Sailor." You know, the giant bird whose egg was fifty paces around."
"Wow! Some egg!" said Benjamin.
"Some bird!" added Charlie.
"It has to be strong," said Emma. "Very
strong. And fierce. See its talons! Each one will be the size of my hand."
"Nasty." said Benjamin.
It dawned on Charlie that this bird wasn't just a drawing made for fun. It had a
very special purpose "Emma," he said, "is that how you . . . ? I
mean do you have to be a bird before you can — fly?"
"Yes. But I have to think of the bird first. I
see it in my mind, and then — it happens."
The boys stared at her in awe.
"Wow. That
must be awesome," Benjamin said at last.
"It's a bit scary actually" Emma admitted.
"I've only done it three times in my life. When I came to live with Auntie
Julia, she didn't even want to talk about it, but now she's gotten used to it.
There are times when I shall just have to fly."
"Hello, boys!" Miss Ingledew looked into the
room. "How about some hot muffins? It's such a cold day."
"Yes, please," said the boys, both rubbing
their stomachs.
Miss Ingledew popped out to the kitchen and came back
with a tray of muffins and hot chocolate. Charlie told her about his visit to
the hospital.
"I wanted to ask Uncle Paton about the book, but
my awful aunts were there and he wouldn't talk." He handed Miss Ingledew
the little brown book. "He said I would need it for . . . ," Charlie
hesitated, "for visiting someone."
Miss Ingledew darted him a quizzical look. "I
see." She opened the book and scanned the pages. "This is a Welsh
dictionary Charlie. Welsh and English, that is. Your uncle has marked some of
the words, see!" She showed them the small stars that were scattered
throughout the book.
"Why those words?" said Charlie.
"I've noticed that they're all verbs," said
Miss Ingledew, "or commands. 'Move,' 'fly' 'talk,' 'push,' 'listen,'
'look,' 'catch,' 'run,' et cetera. And look, he's written the pronunciations at
the front of the book."
"But why?" asked Charlie. "What can it
mean?"
"Welsh is an unusual language. It doesn't always sound
the way it looks. I can only think that your uncle wanted you to learn the
Welsh for these words. But I've no idea
why"
"When the time comes, you'll know" said Emma
Miss Ingledew smiled at her niece. "What strange children
you are," she said fondly "I'm not sure that I would like to be
endowed." "Me, neither," said Benjamin.
A chilly dusk had begun to steal through the streets
as Charlie and Benjamin left the bookshop Runner Bean made sure they kept up a
brisk pace.
As they approached number nine, Benjamin slowed down.
"Who is this person you might be visiting?" he asked Charlie.
Charlie told him about the painting of Skarpo.
"You mean you can go in, right in, to the
painting? And then what?" Benjamin
looked alarmed.
"He's a magician, Ben. A sorcerer. And a bit of
magic could help me to rescue Henry."
"Which bit?" said Benjamin gravely “And
how?"
"I don't know do I — until I get in!"
"Suppose you can't get out?"
"Don't be crazy Ben. It's not as if I'll go right
into another time, like Henry It'll be like when I hear voices. I don't go
right into the photos. It's just my mind."
"Hm," muttered Benjamin. "Be
careful." He turned away and crossed the road with Runner Bean bounding beside
him.
Charlie ran up the steps to number nine. He wished he
hadn't snapped at Benjamin. To tell the truth he was a little afraid of what
might happen when he went into the sorcerer's room.
Mrs. Bone had laid clean clothes on the bed, ready for
school. Charlie began to pack his bag. He left the painting until last. Without
looking at it he began to wrap it in a shirt. But as he turned the painting
over he caught sight of the sorcerer's dark figure. Once again, the face turned
toward him.
"Soon!" said the sorcerer.
THE
TOLLROC
Olivia had made a
decision.
If it was impossible for Charlie to find Henry then she would. She wouldn’t tell anyone about it. She
would just do it.
During the first break on Monday Olivia wandered
around the field by herself. Bindi was still at home with the flu and
Olivia
didn't feel like joining the other girls. They were discussing the new play and
Olivia hadn't been given a very good part. Mrs.
Marlowe head of the drama department, had told her that she must let others
have a chance to shine. After all,
she'd had a
starring
role in the Christmas play.
"What's up, Olivia?" called Charlie.
"What? Brown hair?" said Fidelio.
The two boys strolled over to her.
"I've been too busy for hair," said Olivia.
"Anyway, I needed
a change. Any news of Henry?"
Charlie shook his head. "I know he's
in the ruin but I can't get in. I'm still being watched. Look!" He glanced across the field at Zelda Dobinski
and her friend, Beth Strong. They were both staring at him. On the other side
of the field, Manfred and Asa were pacing beside the wood. Manfred looked over
his shoulder, saw Charlie, and looked away
"Asa's bandages are off, then," Olivia
remarked.
"That means he's back in business," said
Fidelio grimly
This was bad news. Olivia gave a nervous shrug. She
noticed Lucretia Yewbeam standing beside the garden door. The matron was
watching Charlie.
"Your aunt's still on the warpath," said
Olivia.
Charlie told her about Paton's accident. "He said
they did it; his own sisters tried to run him over."
"But why?" asked Olivia.
"I'm not sure, but I think it's got something to
do with a picture they gave me. It's a painting of a sorcerer called Skarpo. He
might be able to help me rescue Henry."
"How?" asked Fidelio. "He can't come
out of the painting, can he?"
"No, but I can go in."
Fidelio and Olivia looked dumbstruck.
"But you've got to find Henry first," Olivia
murmured.
"I know." Charlie sighed. "And I
haven't a clue how I'm going to do that."
Olivia looked up at the slate gray clouds and gave a
mysterious smile. "Not long now" she said.
Before Charlie could work out what she meant, the horn
sounded for the end of break and Olivia rushed off to her mime lesson.
That
evening, when the juniors were getting ready for bed, Olivia prepared herself
for the night ahead She set the alarm on her watch for midnight, kept her
tights on under her pajamas, and placed her outdoor shoes close to the head of
her bed.
She needn't have bothered with the alarm. At midnight
she was still wide awake. She was both anxious and excited at the prospect of
going into the ruin alone at night.
Quickly slipping out of bed, Olivia put on her shoes
and swung her purple cape around her shoulders. She tiptoed across the
dormitory and was about to open the door, when a voice whispered, "Is that
you, Olivia?"
"What if it is?"
"Where are you going?" asked Emma Tolly in a
hushed voice.
"Shh! To the bathroom."
"You're not. You're going out, aren't you?"
There was a creak and, all at once, Emma was standing beside Olivia. "Let
me come with you."
"No. It's got nothing to do with you. Go back to
bed or we'll be caught." Olivia opened the door and leaped into the
passage.
"I want to help," said Emma as Olivia closed
the door.
Why's Emma
being friendly? Olivia wondered as she hurried along the chilly
passages. Suspicious, that's what it is.
She became more cautious as she passed the senior
girls' dormitories. She didn't want Zelda Dobinski or Beth Strong to leap out
and grab her. The assistant matrons always looked so tired they were bound to be
asleep. That left only Matron Yewbeam, and she was probably lurking near
Charlie's dormitory
A cold
wind had blown the clouds away and a full moon beamed through the windows that
Olivia occasionally passed. There was just enough light in the long passages
for her to see her way to the staircase.
The hall looked vast when it was empty and here Olivia
kept close to the paneled walls. As she skirted the great slate-stoned room she
kept an anxious eye on the staircase, but no one appeared. She reached the garden
door, drew back the bolts, and slipped out into the night.
The moon was so bright that every stone and plant,
every bush and blade of grass was silvered with light. Olivia gave in to a
sudden urge. She spread her cape out like wings, and rushed across the frozen
ground in joyful, leaping strides.
The dark walls of the ruin brought her back to earth. This was the part she'd been dreading. She wrapped her
cape tightly around her body and slipped through the entrance.
For a moment, Olivia thought she must be dreaming. A
cat sat in the center of the paved courtyard. It was a bright coppery red, and
every whisker, every hair was glowing.
The cat purred softly and Olivia realized that she had
seen it before, at Miss Ingledew's Christmas party. In the bookshop it had looked unusual, but
here, in the dark, it was magical.
"You're Aries, aren't you?" breathed Olivia.
The cat purred, then he turned and ran to one of the
dark tunnels that led into the ruin. It was boarded with thick wooden planks,
but the cat stepped neatly through a gap at the bottom.
If he can
do it,
so can
I, thought Olivia. Kneeling on the ground, she squeezed under the planks, just
as the cat had done; arms first and then her legs. As soon as she was in the
tunnel Olivia stood up and followed the glowing cat.
The tunnel had a dangerous slope; the ground was slimy
and black water dripped from the rocky walls. Olivia kept her eyes on the cat.
He was leading her somewhere and she had to trust him.
They
emerged at last onto a wooded bank and before Olivia had time to get her
bearings the cat was off again, weaving his way down
through the trees to a shadowy glade. In the center of the glade, an orange cat
and a yellow cat stood on a large black rock. Their eyes glittered green and gold
in the moonlight.
Using the trees to steady herself Olivia walked down
the steep bank. She crossed the glade and reached the black rock. The three
cats, standing so close together, shone like a bonfire.
Olivia looked down to see her heavy black shoes turned
to gold by the flames. And then she noticed a thin gap beside her feet. The
rock seemed to be covering a pit. Could it possibly be a dungeon? She knelt in
the grass and called, "Henry! Henry! Are you there?"
A thin voice came floating up to her. "Hello. I
think it's me, but I'm not sure anymore."
"Well, I'm sure," said Olivia. "You're
Henry all right. Have they been starving you? I forgot to bring food."
"Zelda and Manfred push bread through the gap,
and bottles of water."
Olivia heard a scuffling noise and all at once, two
eyes were peering up at her through the gap.
"Hello, Olivia," said Henry "I'm so
glad to see you."
"It's good to see you, too, Henry But not in that
pit. How did they catch you?"
"A boy with white hair tricked
me."
"Billy Raven," muttered Olivia. "I
didn't think he'd sink that low."
"Manfred brought me out here, and a girl called
Zelda. They put sticky tape on my mouth and arms! It hurt like anything when I
pulled it off."
"Ouch!" said Olivia.
"Olivia, I've seen my cousin Zeke," said
Henry "He's so old and horrible. He still hates me after all this time. He
made them bring me out here. Zelda moved that rock just by looking at it. I
can't get out. I've tried and tried. But I can't budge the rock an inch."
"I'll
try," said Olivia.
She threw
her whole weight at the rock, but it' didn't move. For the next few
minutes Olivia tried pushing and pulling, kicking and hitting the rock, but it
was useless.
"I'm
sorry Henry we'll have to try something else.” she said. "I'll tell Charlie where you are and
we'll work
something
out, I promise."
"They're
going to move me on Sunday" Henry said desperately "I don't know
where I'll be going. I don't think I'll see any of you again — ever."
"We'll
get here on Saturday" Olivia said firmly "Charlie's uncle will help.
Will you be all right till then? Is it cold down there?"
"It
was at first, but the cats keep me warm. They keep my spirits up. Their light
is so cheerful. And then, there's the tree."
"What
tree?"
"It must be very close," said Henry
"Whenever I feel really gloomy I can hear the leaves singing, and it makes
me feel better."
Olivia was mystified. It was winter and the trees were
bare. She looked around and was just in time to see two figures in plaid
bathrobes rush down the bank. The cats yowled a warning and leaped at the
strangers. There were two shrieks as Zelda and Beth tripped over the cats and
tumbled to the ground.
Olivia jumped up and ran for the tunnel, but Zelda was
on her feet again. She made a grab for Olivia and caught her arm. Olivia swung
around and punched Zelda in the stomach.
"Help!" screeched Olivia, although there was
no one else around.
The cats were having quite a tussle with big Beth
Strong; biting and scratching every part of her body that they could reach.
With a loud grunt of fury Beth threw them off and lunged at Olivia, catching
her around the waist.
"Got
you!" Beth cried triumphantly
"You've
had it, Olivia Vertigo," said Zelda. "We're going to tie you to a
tree, and very soon a vicious old beast is going to come prowling around here. You'll be in a very nasty mess by
morning."
"You won't get away with this," cried
Olivia. "My mom'll. . ."
"Your mom'll be too late," said Beth.
"Naughty girls shouldn't go out at night."
Shrieking with laughter, Zelda drew a piece of rope
out of her pocket. As she pulled Olivia's wrists behind her back, the moon was
suddenly obscured by a huge black cloud. The cloud seemed to be falling to
earth; it dropped toward them and now Olivia could see it was a gigantic bird.
The vast wings drove a rustling wind across the glade
and Zelda and Beth gazed up in horror. All at once they were in the air; hooked
up by the necks of their bathrobes, and dangling from the talons of a great
feathered foot.
"Kraaak!"
called the bird.
Olivia shrank against the bare trees and watched in horrified amazement. Beth and
Zelda sailed into the night sky Beth's head lolled forward in a faint, while
Zelda's mouth was open in a silent scream.
Olivia tore up the bank and began to slither along the
tunnel. The cats had joined her and filled the tunnel with their bright light.
But when Olivia squeezed through the boarded entrance the cats remained behind.
"Thanks!" whispered Olivia.
She raced across the garden, not daring to look back.
The door into the hall was still unlocked. There was no one about. Olivia crept
up the stairs. As she entered her dormitory one of the windows closed with a
soft thud. Olivia could see a figure silhouetted against the moonlight.
"Who's that?" she whispered.
"Me," said Dorcas. "I was just shutting
the window It was freezing in here. Where've you been?" Dorcas was one of
the endowed but Olivia had never seen any evidence of a magical talent.
"I've
been to the bathroom." said Olivia.
"Did
you see Emma? She's gone, too."
"Er —
yes," said Olivia.
"Night then." Dorcas closed the curtains and
got into bed.
For several minutes Olivia sat in the dark wondering
about the window. Who had opened it? And where was Emma? They said Emma could
fly Was it possible that she and the bird in the ruin were one and the same? If
it were true, then Emma would need a way to come back.
When she
was sure Dorcas was asleep, Olivia tiptoed out of the dormitory and opened one
of the windows in the corridor.
"Good
luck, Emma!" she murmured.
The next morning, Olivia could barely keep her eyes open.
Emma looked exhausted, too. The girls went down to breakfast together. They
caught up with Charlie and Fidelio, just as they were going into the dining
hall.
"You two look as if you've been awake all
night," said Charlie.
"We have," said Olivia, grinning at Emma.
"Tell you about it later."
In the first break the two girls found Charlie and
Fidelio sitting on a pile of logs outside the ruin.
"What's the news, then?" asked Charlie.
Olivia told them about her adventure. Charlie looked
at Emma. "The tollroc came to life, then?" he said.
"Of course," said Emma.
At that moment, Gabriel came running up. "Have
you heard?" he cried, dropping on to a log. "Beth and Zelda were
found wandering on the Heights in their pajamas. They're in a state of shock
and can't remember how they got there."
"We know;" said Olivia.
When she told Gabriel about the tollroc, he stared at
Emma in disbelief.
"You don't eat gerbils, do you?" he asked
gravely
Emma shook her head and everybody laughed But as the
laughter died, a chilly draft crept down Charlie's neck and he thought of Henry
"I can't wait until the weekend," he said.
"Tonight. I may need your help."
Fidelio stared at Charlie. "You mean . . .?"
"I'm going to visit Skarpo."
THE
WAND
Charlie decided to use the art room for his visit to
the sorcerer. The painting of Skarpo wouldn't look out of place among the other
pieces of artwork, and if anyone caught him, he could say Emma had asked him to
look at her sketches.
As soon as homework was over, he began to make his way
up to the dormitory
"What's the hurry Charlie Bone?" asked a
voice behind him.
Charlie turned to see Manfred strolling toward him.
"No
hurry," said Charlie as casually as he could.
"I
want a word with you," said Manfred.
"Now?"
"Yes. Now." Manfred came up to Charlie and
stared at him.
Charlie looked away quickly He couldn't afford to be
hypnotized when he was so close to rescuing Henry.
"Look at me!" Manfred demanded.
"I don't want to," said Charlie. “Anyway you
know I can play your mind games."
"Hm." Manfred stroked his chin, where a few
wispy hairs were beginning to sprout.
"You've got a fine beard coming in,
Manfred," said Charlie.
Manfred couldn't decide if Charlie was being rude or
flattering him. “All right. You can go now. But try and keep out of trouble."
"Yes, Manfred." Charlie hurried away
Why had Manfred stopped him? It was almost as if he
were trying to slow him down.
As Charlie walked into the dormitory Billy Raven
turned quickly from Charlie's bedside closet. He was holding the painting of
Skarpo.
"What do you think you're doing?" said
Charlie angrily
"I was looking for something of mine," said
Billy innocently. "I thought it might have got into your closet by
accident. So I looked, and this fell out."
"It couldn't have. It was right at the back.
You've been spying."
"Why are you always so suspicious?" said
Billy resentfully "I'm telling the truth."
"Give it to me!" Charlie demanded.
"OK. OK." As Billy handed the painting to
Charlie he pointed to a dagger lying on Skarpo's table. "Look at that dagger.
It's so bright. I bet it was as sharp as anything. I bet it killed a few
people."
"I bet," said Charlie, grabbing the
painting. "Just leave my stuff alone in the future."
"Sorry Charlie." Billy smiled. "I
didn't mean to be nosy."
Charlie hurried out of the dormitory. He waited for a few seconds to make sure Billy
wouldn't follow him, and then he ran down the passage that led to the art room.
He was surprised to find his friends already waiting
for him. Even Lysander had turned up.
"Gabriel
told me what you're going to do," he said. "I'll stand by the door in
case anyone tries to come in while you're . . . out of action."
"Thanks,
Lysander," said Charlie.
They chose
an empty space behind one of Mr. Boldova's large canvases. Charlie sat on the
floor with the painting in front of him. Olivia and Emma knelt on either side
of him, while Gabriel and Fidelio perched on a bench in front of
him.
All at once, Charlie began to have doubts. He'd never done this before. How
would he get out of the painting? He hadn't really thought it through. But
somehow it was too late to stop.
Charlie
took a deep breath. "OK. I'm going in."
"Hold on, Charlie," said Gabriel. "Just
so we know — are you going to bring that weird-looking person into this
room?"
"Skarpo? No, I hope not. I'm just going to ask
his advice. Maybe I'll borrow something." Charlie was already beginning
to feel dizzy "I don't. . . ," he began, and then Skarpo looked at
him, and he could hear the swish of the sorcerer's robes and the squeak of
chalk on stone.
"Enter," said a voice.
Charlie's friends began to fade. A white mist drifted
around him, obscuring everything except the sorcerer's bony face with its
strange golden yellow eyes.
When the mist cleared, Charlie found himself in a
chilly candlelit room. He could smell burning candle grease, pine, spices, and
ancient decaying things. The sorcerer's possessions were no longer merely painting
objects. Now they were real; pages were rough and ink-stained, feathers were
delicate, and velvet smooth, the earthenware bowls were pitted and chipped, and
belts and straps had a worn, shiny look.
Charlie's eyes fell on the dagger. It was lying in
front of a large open book, right at the edge of the long table. Candlelight
made it gleam with life. The blade was so thin it was just a shaft of brilliant
light.
"What is it you want, child?"
Charlie jumped. He'd forgotten that the sorcerer could
see him, too.
"You know what that weapon is? It's magic, boy.”
The sorcerer's magnetic eyes glittered.
"You can see me," breathed Charlie.
"I can see your face. You've been peeping at me for
days, you rascal." The sorcerer's voice had a lilt to it, but it was
definitely not Welsh.
"I've come to ask for your help," Charlie
said nervously
"Is that so?" Skarpo smiled grimly
"Then it's the dagger you'll be after. It can pierce a heart and leave no
mark at all. Not even a pinprick."
"I don't want to kill anyone," said Charlie.
Skarpo ignored this. "A mere touch and they're
gone," he persisted.
Billy Raven had drawn Charlie's attention to the
dagger. But Billy was no friend of Henry's and the dagger was the last thing
Charlie would choose.
"I don't want the dagger," he said. "I
want to rescue a friend."
"Someone wants it," muttered the sorcerer.
"Someone wants it very much. They've been trying to reach it but they're
not — how can I put it? They're not accomplished magicians."
Ezekiel
Bloor, thought
Charlie. He scanned the table. What could be used to get Henry out of his
dungeon? How could he possibly know what to choose? Skarpo was being
deliberately unhelpful.
"Herbs?" the sorcerer suggested. "A
poisonous potion?"
"No, thank you."
"Slip one of these fine feathers into your
enemy's boot, and he'll be lame for a year." Skarpo gave a malicious
chuckle.
"I don't want to make anyone lame." Charlie
was beginning to lose heart. "I just want to rescue someone."
"Rescue? Rescuing is no concern of mine. Destruction
is more to my liking. If you want someone maimed, or fatally wounded, poisoned,
burned, vanished, shrunk, driven mad . . . ?"
"All those things sound very useful."
Charlie thought he ought to be polite, just to keep Skarpo on his side.
"But right now I just need something that will
move a rock."
It was then that he saw the wand. It had to be a wand,
for it couldn't be anything else. A slim white stick lay behind one of the
huge books. It was about half a meter long with a
pointed silver tip. Charlie picked it up.
"You can't have that," said Skarpo sharply
"It doesn’t belong to me."
"Whose is it, then?" asked Charlie. The wand
was cool and smooth, and it seemed to fit into his hand as if it belonged
there.
"I stole it," said Skarpo. "It belonged
to a Welsh wizard. It'll be of no use to you at all."
"But I think it will," said Charlie
excitedly "I think it's just what I need."
"NO!" Skarpo made a grab for the wand.
Charlie ran around the table. "I'll bring it
back. Honest."
"Give it to me this instant," roared Skarpo.
"Or I'll turn you into a toad."
"No, I need it." Charlie ducked away from
the sorcerer's long arm.
"Villain. Thief You've asked for it!" Skarpo
picked up a spear and swung it at Charlie's head. Paper, feathers, and herbs
went fluttering off the table.
Charlie rushed for a low door at the back of the room.
He twisted the handle but it was stuck fast. As he bobbed out of Skarpo's reach
again, he closed his eyes and thought of his friends in the art room. "I
want to be there — NOW!" he said aloud.
It didn't work. He was still in the sorcerer's cell.
Skarpo was chanting now as he raised the spear, ready to hurl at Charlie.
"Vile, creeping wretch, I'll burn your heart out," he cried.
Charlie cowered against the wall. There was no escape.
Benjamin had warned him about this. Why hadn't he listened? "Help,"
he moaned.
The tip of the spear glowed like a red-hot poker, then
suddenly burst into flames. As it flew toward him, Charlie bent his head and
wrapped his cape around the wand.
The
flaming spear never reached him. When Charlie looked up he saw two hands catch
the spear and fling it back at the sorcerer. The hands were brown with shining
gold bracelets at the wrists; beyond the bracelets there was nothing, no sign of a body at all
The spear
struck the wall and then fell at Skarpo’s feet. He screamed as the flames
caught the hem ot his long robe. Charlie didn't see what happened next because
invisible arms tightened around him and tugged him away Back, back through the
wreaths of smoke that were filling the room.
"CHARLIE,
COME BACK!"
Charlie blinked. His eyes were still smarting from the
fire, but the sorcerer's room looked small and faraway. He was looking at it, but he wasn't in it. The
painting was held by two brown hands. The hands that had saved him. Charlie
looked up into Lysander's anxious face.
"You had us worried for a moment there,
Charlie," said Lysander.
"It was your hands," Charlie murmured.
"You saved me."
"Not me," said Lysander. "I had to call
on my spirit ancestors. Good to have you back, Charlie."
"What happened — out here?" asked Charlie.
"It was amazing." Olivia poked her head in
front of him. "You were rocking about and shouting, and we kept saying,
'Wake up, Charlie! Come out!'"
"But you wouldn't." Fidelio peered over
Olivia. "So Lysander used his African language to call his ancestors. And
then, all of a sudden, you stopped moving and something appeared in your hands.
Just like that. Look!"
Charlie found that he was still holding the wand. It
lay across his knees, smooth and pale, its silver tip glittering in the bright
lights of the art room.
"What is it?" asked Emma.
“A wand," said Gabriel. "I bet it's a wand."
Charlie nodded. "Skarpo didn't want me to have
it. He stole it from a Welsh wizard. I know what I've got to do now! I'll have
to use one of the words in my uncle's book."
"You haven't got long, Charlie," said
Olivia. "Thcy’re moving Henry on Sunday and then we'll never find
him."
"How are we going to get into the ruin?"
Fidelio asked with a sigh. "They're watching us like hawks."
"If only Tancred would come back," Lysander
murmured sadly “A storm would be a good distraction."
“A storm would be great, but we can't wait for
Tancred," said Charlie. "It'll have to be Saturday when we can get
help from outside." He stood up and tried to hide the wand in the sleeve
of his cape, but it was too long and stuck out beyond his hand.
"Give it to me," said Lysander. "My
arms are longer."
Charlie held out the wand and Lysander fit it neatly
into his sleeve.
"We'd better go now" said Emma.
"Matron'll be on the warpath."
Charlie hid the painting under his cape, and the six
children filed out of the art room.
As they walked back to their dormitories, Matron came
rushing toward them, shouting, "Where have you children been? It was
lights out five minutes ago."
"Sorry Matron," Lysander said with a smile.
"We were looking at Emma's work. And mine, actually"
Matron had "detention" written all over her
face. The children waited to hear their fates. If they were given detention on
Saturday how could they possibly rescue Henry? Matron smiled triumphantly
"You'll all. . . ," she began.
But a voice behind the little group said, "It's my
fault, Matron. I gave them permission. In fact I told them to come to the art
room. Blame it on the art teacher, eh?"
Lucretia Yewbeam's smile of triumph faded as Mr.
Boldova walked to the front of the group.
"Sorry about this, Matron," said the art teacher.
"I lost track of time." He turned back to the children. "You'd
all better run off now. And thank you for your excellent criticisms."
The six children scattered like dust as Mr. Boldova asked
the matron's advice about a very bad bruise he'd received while playing
rugby
"Good old Boldova," Gabriel whispered as the
three boys crept into their dormitory
"Where've you lot been?" Billy demanded.
"Wouldn't you like to know," said Charlie.
TANCRED
AND THE TREE
At the top of the Thunder House, Tancred Torsson
surveyed the wreck of his bedroom. He kicked a pile of shoes out of his way and
sat on the bed, or what was left of it. The mattress lay on the other side of
the room, and his covers were in a tangled heap under the fallen wardrobe.
Tancred was wearing his pajama bottoms and his green
cape. Most of his clothes were torn or stained with food. He was tired of being
angry but he couldn't do anything about it. Little waves of fury kept spilling
out of him, sending the air into a turmoil.
Mrs. Torsson put her head around the door. "Are
you coming down to supper, dear?" she asked nervously.
"Do you trust me?" Tancred stared grimly at
the floor.
"Well, it's been a bit quieter today" said
Mrs. Torsson.
"Sorry about the headaches, Mom," said
Tancred.
"You
can't help it, dear. I know."
Tancred's
mother scurried downstairs. There were days when she longed to live somewhere
else, with
a nice
ordinary husband and a small, quiet son. But she loved her tempestuous family
and, in spite of the headaches, she knew she could
never be as happy with anyone else.
Tancred
followed his mother downstairs and took his place at the kitchen table. Mr.
Torsson was already digging in to a large portion of shepherd's pie.
Mrs.
Torsson put a plastic plate in front of her son. She'd given up on china for the time being.
"There," she said, spooning some pie onto Tancred's plate.
"It's
about time you calmed down," Mr. Torsson told his son. "This stormy
bout has gone on far too long."
Tancred's paper cup blew over. Luckily it was empty. "I can't help it, Dad," he said.
"I've tried, but I can't."
"If you ask me, that hypnotizer's got something
to do with it," boomed Mr. Torsson. "Manfred Bloor. He's put you into
a real state, hasn't he?"
"I don't want to talk about it," said
Tancred as the hood of his cape suddenly blew over his head.
"Control yourself," thundered Mr. Torsson.
The light above the table swung violently from side to
side.
"See, you're not much better," Tancred
remarked.
"I can direct the violence," said Mr.
Torsson. "What we have is a very useful talent, but talents have to be
focused."
"Yes, Dad." Tancred gritted his teeth, but
the window behind him blew open with a loud clang. "Sorry," he
mumbled.
And then, through the window, a curious sound could be
heard. It was hardly more than a whisper, but it had a strange effect on
Tancred. He found that he was listening to music that was like no other music
in the world. He stood up, straightened his cape, and carefully pushed back his
chair.
"What is it, Tancred?" asked Mrs. Torsson, surprised
by his unusually calm behavior.
"I have to go," Tancred said gently
"Where?"
asked his father
"Out
there!" Tancred pointed through the window at the dark trees in the woods.
He strode past his startled parents and left the house before they had time to
ask any more questions.
The ragged
moon threw a thin light through the trees, but Tancred didn't hesitate. He knew
which way to go. Deep in the woods he found what he was looking for — the source of the haunting music.
It was a
tree.
The tree was red. The leaves that covered its slender
branches seemed to burn with an inner fire, and the glade where Tancred stood
was lit by a golden glow. Deep lines scored the bark, where water dripped
slowly down the trunk. Looking closer, Tancred saw that the water too was red;
as red as blood.
As he listened to the tree's hushed song, he felt a
great stillness overwhelm him. His storms were there, deep inside, but Tancred
knew he could control them. His strange
talent had lost its grip on him.
He left
the tree but when he was almost out of the woods, he looked back. The fiery
light was gone and the song had ended.
"I kept your supper warm," said Mrs. Torsson
as Tancred entered the kitchen.
"What happened out there?" asked the father.
"There was a tree, Dad. A red tree; it was kind
of singing, but not any sort of song I've ever heard before."
Mr. Torsson frowned. "I've heard of a red
tree," he said thoughtfully "My mother told me a story when I was
very young. Darned if I can remember it now She said it was the Red King."
"Our ancestor!" said Tancred.
"My headache's gone!" murmured Mrs. Torsson.
Tancred smiled. "I'm going to see my friends tomorrow,"
he said.
“About time, too," said Mr. Torsson.
After supper, when Tancred was tidying his room, his
mother appeared with a pile of clean clothes and sheets. She'd kept them hidden
while he was in the grip of his storms, as she put it.
"You
look so much better," she said. "Even your hair is lying down."
"I am
better, Mom," said Tancred.
He had the
best night's sleep he could remember. When he woke up, the mattress was still on his
bed, and so were the sheets and blankets. He dressed quickly and had a very
civilized breakfast with his family Mrs. Torsson even served his bacon and eggs
on a china plate.
After breakfast Tancred walked down the hill to an
imposing house set behind ornate iron gates.
He opened the gates, marched up the gravel drive, and pressed the bell.
Lysander
opened the door.
"Hi,
Sander!" said Tancred.
“Am I glad to see you," said Lysander, and his
huge smile almost split his face in two. "You coming to school,
then?"
"You
bet," said Tancred.
************************************
Charlie didn't know Tancred was back until he went to
the King's room that evening. He had just put his homework on the table when
Gabriel came running in.
"Guess what?" said Gabriel. "I've seen
Tancred!"
Charlie could hardly believe it. "That's
fantastic!" He said happily
Asa limped into the room. His bandages were off but
the scars on his hands were still red and painful. "What are you two
smirking about?" he snarled.
"Just a bit of good news," said Charlie.
The room began to fill up. Emma took her place next to
Charlie, and Billy came hopping in after Manfred. Dorcas was next, and then, at
last, Lysander and Tancred arrived.
"Hi, Tanc!" said Gabriel and Charlie.
"Good to see you back," Emma added quietly
Before Tancred could reply Manfred said, "Shut
up, and get on with your homework. Tancred and Lysander, you're late!"
"Sorry pal," said Tancred with a grin.
"I'm not your pal," snapped Manfred.
This seemed to annoy Manfred even more. He scowled at Tancred, but couldn't think of
anything else to say
Billy Raven gazed sadly at Manfred. "So sorry to
hear your girlfriend's ill," he said, obviously hoping to earn a few
sweets. Unfortunately it had the opposite effect.
"What?" Manfred glared at Billy
"Zelda," said Billy nervously
"She's not my girlfriend," barked Manfred.
"And I'd advise you to mind your own business, Billy Raven."
"Yes, Manfred."
Everyone put their heads down and began to work. In
spite of the intense concentration in the room, Charlie was aware that,
somehow, a weight had been lifted. There was a fresh and hopeful atmosphere.
Now there are five of us, he thought. And only three of them. Dorcas was a
puzzle. No one knew what her endowment was. Even when she was doing homework
there was a smile on her face. Charlie liked to think that she was neither on
one side or the other, but placed firmly in the middle.
He looked up at the painting of the Red King. Would
the tree appear again? And could he go into this painting? Would he hear the
Red King speak?
Manfred's voice cut into Charlie's thoughts. "Daydreaming
won't get you anywhere, Bone. Get on with your work!"
"Yes, Manfred." Charlie was about to look
away from the painting when he noticed a shadow fall behind the figure of the
king. Gradually the shadow took shape. It became a face beneath a dark hood.
And Charlie became convinced that this dark figure was blocking him. It would
never let him hear the King's voice, or step any closer.
"Do you want detention, Bone?" shouted
Manfred.
"No . . . no. Sorry Manfred. I was just thinking.
My homework's a bit difficult today" Charlie fumbled with his books.
"Just get on with it," grunted Manfred.
Charlie kept his head down until the clock struck eight, and they were
all released.
Tancred and Lysander caught up with him as he hurried
away from the King's room.
"Sander's told me everything," Tancred told Charlie. "I hope I can help
with your cousin's problem."
"You bet you can," said Charlie.
"Somehow I've got to get into the ruin. It must be on Saturday when I'm
not being watched."
"That means you'll have to get in from the other
side." Lysander looked doubtful. "It's very dangerous, Charlie.
There's a deep gorge with a river at the bottom. You'll have to scale the
cliffs and they're almost sheer."
Charlie didn't like the sound of it. "Maybe I
could get in through a window in one of the towers, if there was a
distraction." He looked at Tancred.
“A storm?" asked Tancred.
"That would be great."
"Do you want me to keep the wand, Charlie?"
Lysander made a sweeping movement in the air.
"I think it would be safer with you," said
Charlie.
"What are you three doing?" Dr. Bloor came
marching up to them. "You shouldn't be lurking about here. Hurry along
now."
"Yes, sir," said the three boys.
They dared not say anything more to one another. With
a quick grin, Charlie left the older boys and walked up to his dormitory
That night Charlie found it difficult to sleep. He was
haunted by thoughts of falling down steep cliffs and drowning in fast-flowing
rivers. Next morning he was so preoccupied he nearly went clown to breakfast in
his pajamas. Luckily Fidelio was waiting for him.
"You'll be in trouble if you go down like
that."
"I can't think properly I keep wondering what'll
happen to Henry if we don't get him out."
"We will get him out," said Fidelio, though
he sounded much less confident than usual.
Later that day something happened that changed their
mood entirely When they went to the cafeteria for lunch, they were surprised to
see Cook behind the counter.
As Charlie
came up to get his portion, Cook bent her head over a pan of macaroni and said in an undertone,
"I've had a message from Mr. Onimous. You're to go to the Pets' Café at
two o'clock on Saturday"
"Why?" said Charlie.
"Move up, Charlie," Billy Raven whined from
the line. "We're hungry."
Fidelio stepped back onto his foot.
"Ouch!" yelled Billy
"So sorry Billy," said Fidelio in a loud
voice.
Taking advantage of the noise, Cook murmured quickly
"It's going to be all right. Mr. Onimous has the answer." She raised
her voice and said, "Here you are, Charlie. Macaroni without the
peas."
"Yippee!" said Fidelio, joining Charlie at
his table. "Something for us veggies, at last." He lowered his voice.
"I heard what Cook said, so cheer up, Charlie! All will be revealed on
Saturday."
The next day was Friday During the first break, Charlie
and Fidelio managed to pass on Cook's message to Tancred and Lysander. Gabriel
had already been told, and he passed the news on to Emma and Olivia. After all,
it was they who had found Henry
"You'll have to bring a pet," Gabriel warned
the girls. "I can lend you a gerbil each; I've got plenty to spare."
"Actually" said Olivia. "I've got some
very nice rabbits."
Emma accepted the offer of a gerbil.
That evening, Charlie wrapped the painting of Skarpo
in his pajamas. He put it carefully at the bottom of his bag and then piled the
rest of his clothes on top.
Billy Raven sat on his bed watching Charlie pack. The
others had already left and the two boys were alone.
"Why are you taking that painting home
again?" asked Billy
"Because I want to," said Charlie. He used
to feel sorry for Billy all on his own in the creepy academy every weekend. But
he was sure that spying had brought the orphan a great many rewards; bars of
chocolate, late-night hot cocoa, fur-lined boots, and powerful flashlights, to
name but a few
"I'll be off, then," said Charlie, zipping
up his bag. "Have a good weekend,
Billy"
"I don't think you will," said Billy
What did he mean? Charlie was too distracted by his
own plans to worry about Billy's spiteful little digs. He rushed down to the
hall where Fidelio was waiting for him. The two boys were the last to leave.
On Friday afternoons, Dr. Bloor and Manfred always
waited in the hall until the last pupil left the building. As Charlie and
Fidelio walked toward the tall double doors, Dr. Bloor stepped in front of
them.
"I want to see what's in your bag," the
headmaster said to Charlie.
"My bag, sir?" Charlie was very glad he'd
given Skarpo's wand to Lysander.
"Your bag, Bone. Empty it!"
"Here, sir?"
"Right here!"
"He'll miss the bus, sir," said Fidelio.
"This is none of your business, Gunn,"
barked Dr. Bloor. "Run along."
Fidelio didn't move. "I'll wait for Charlie,
sir," he said.
Charlie opened his bag and turned it upside down.
Clothes, shoes, and books lay in a pile on the floor. Manfred bent down and
shook out every item of clothing and every book. Even Charlie's sneakers were
investigated. As the head boy picked up Charlie's pajamas, the painting fell
out.
"There's only this!" Manfred held the
painting out to Dr. Bloor.
Ah. A very fine work," said Dr. Bloor.
"Nothing else? Look in the bag, Manfred!"
Manfred felt inside Charlie's bag. He ran his hands
along the lining, shook the pockets, and lifted the board at the bottom.
"Please, sir. We're going to miss the bus,"
Fidelio said bravely
"Then you'll have to walk, won't you?"
snapped Manfred. "Nothing here, Dad." He threw the bag at Charlie. “All
right, you two. Get out of here."
The two boys just managed to catch their bus, but as
it traveled around the city Charlie suddenly began to have doubts about his
uncle. Suppose he were still in the hospital? Suppose his sisters had done something
even worse? Paton had looked so ill when Charlie last saw him. How could he
possibly recover in
time to help Henry?
Charlie ran down Filbert Street dreading more sad
news.
When his mother opened the door of number nine,
Charlie's worst fears were confirmed.
"What's happened?" breathed Charlie.
"Nothing, love." His mother kissed his
cheek. "I just took the day off. Had some shopping to do."
Charlie stepped into the hall. "Is Uncle Paton .
. . ?"
"He's up in his room. A bit sore, but nothing
serious."
"Wow!" Charlie dropped his bag and rushed
upstairs.
For the first time in his life, he burst into his
uncle's room without knocking. Paton was sitting at his desk.
"Hello, Charlie!" said Paton.
For a moment Charlie didn't know what to say He was so
relieved, so overjoyed, in fact, to see his uncle. A hug would have been
appropriate, he thought, but Uncle Paton might be embarrassed.
"I'm so, so glad you're better," said
Charlie at last.
"Me, too. You should see my bruises. They're very
impressive."
Charlie could see a cut and a large bruise on his
uncle's forehead where the bandage had been. "Your head looks very er,
colorful."
Paton laughed. "That's nothing. The others are
works of art!" He patted the arm of his rather shabby velvet jacket.
Lowering his voice, he added, "They didn't finish me off, though."
"Do you think they really meant to?" asked
Charlie.
Paton shrugged. "Who knows? With sisters like
mine, anything is possible."
"Uncle Paton, I've got a lot to tell you," Charlie said gravely
"I'll bet you have. Run along and have your tea
and then we'll discuss!"
Charlie went down to the huge Friday spread Maisie
provided to make up for the academy's meager rations.
"Doesn't your uncle look grand?
Considering," said Maisie.
"Did they find out who did it?" Charlie
asked tentatively "I mean, will they be sent to prison?"
"It was a hired car," Amy Bone told him.
"And the driver was a blonde in dark glasses. That's all they know."
A wig, thought Charlie. Uncle Paton
knows, but he can't prove a thing.
He bolted his tea as fast as he could and ran up to
see his uncle again. Paton had actually cleared a space on his bed for Charlie
to sit down. He had never been invited to sit in his uncle's room before. The
candles had been lit and the oil lamp gave the room a cozy glow
Charlie told his uncle everything from the moment he’d
discovered Henry's capture, to his escape from the sorcerer. Paton did not
interrupt, though he gave a low whistle when Charlie described Olivia's night
with the giant tollroc.
“And a friend of yours now keeps the wand you
found?"
"Lysander," said Charlie. "I trust him.
He saved me from Skarpo."
"But you have the book? You'll have to use Welsh
to command that wand, you know It's the only language it will
understand."
Charlie nodded. He'd already learned some words, and repeated
them to his uncle. "Symuda'r gareg yma!"
"Move that rock." Uncle Paton nodded
approvingly "But it's pronounced like this, Charlie. "Sumidar gareg umma!"
"I'll practice," said Charlie. "It's
lucky that Miss Ingledew found the Welsh dictionary. It was lying in the gutter after your
accident."
"It was very lucky She's a remarkable woman, Miss
Ingledew."
"Are you . . . friends again?" Chadie asked
tentatively.
Paton went slightly pink. "I believe so."
Then he gave a light cough and asked, "So what's your next plan?"
"Tomorrow me and my friends are meeting at the
Pets' Café. Mr. Onimous sent a message. He says he has the answer. But I don't
know what that means. How can he rescue
Henry?"
"The Pets' Café," Paton murmured. "The
Pets' Café." He rubbed his chin thoughtfully "Aha! I should have
remembered." He gave a delighted chuckle. "There's an old passage,
long forgotten. It's mentioned in one of these." He tapped a pile of books
on his desk. "It leads underground, from somewhere in the old city walls,
right into the center of the ruined castle. No one knows where it starts, but
I'll bet you anything Mr. Onimous knows. He has a wonderful, underground,
burrowing look about him."
"It's in the Pets' Café!" Charlie exclaimed.
"Without a doubt," said Paton. "Charlie,
get a bag packed. Tell your mother you're coming to the coast with me on
Saturday night."
"I don't understand," said Charlie.
"Tomorrow you're going to get Henry out of that
pit. You'll bring him back to the Pets' Café, and there he'll have to stay
until nightfall. You'll come back here and tell me that all is well, and
together we'll drive to the café and collect our poor lost relation."
“And where will we take him?"
"Ah — you'll have to wait and see."
AMBUSHED!
On Saturday morning, Benjamin Brown crossed Filbert
Street to number nine. He had done this every Saturday for as long as he could
remember. Runner Bean, as usual, raced across
the road in front of him.
When Benjamin rang the bell he had to wait at least a minute before Charlie opened the door.
"Oh!" said Charlie, when he saw Benjamin.
"It's you!"
"Of course, it's me," said Benjamin.
"Why are you so surprised?"
Charlie felt guilty He had completely forgotten about
Benjamin.
"Come upstairs," he whispered. "I've
got a lot to tell you."
Benjamin stepped inside. "Where's your grandma?
She'll be cross about Runner."
"It's OK. She's gone out. She had a plotting look
on her face. I dread to think what she's up to."
It took Charlie a long time to tell Benjamin everything
that had happened. Benjamin sat motionless on the bed with his mouth open and
his eyes getting wider and wider.
"Phew!" he said, when Charlie had finished.
"You are going to let me come to the Pets' Café, aren't you?"
Charlie didn't see how he could leave Benjamin out.
"Of course. And Runner Bean might be useful."
"Mom wants you to come to our place for lunch. We
can sneak out the back afterward. And then your grandma won't know where you
are."
Charlie thought this an excellent idea. His mother was
at work so he ran down to tell Maisie where he was going, and then the two boys
walked over to number twelve.
That afternoon, everything went according to plan
until they reached Frog Street. Runner Bean gave a low growl and Benjamin saw a
woman in red boots disappear around a corner. High Street was full of shoppers,
so he didn't get a clear view, but the figure looked very familiar.
"I reckon your auntie's been following us,"
said Benjamin, "the one with the red boots."
"Venetia!" said Charlie.
Before walking down Frog Street he scanned the crowds
for a glimpse of the Yewbeam aunts. There was a chilly wind and a lot of people
were wearing hats and head scarves. He couldn't see any of his aunts or his
grandmother.
"We'll have to risk it," he told Benjamin.
They dashed down Frog Street with Runner Bean bounding
ahead of them.
"Welcome, Charlie Bone," said Norton, the
bouncer, as the two boys entered the café. "It's all right, your friend
over there is looking after your pet for you."
Charlie had forgotten about bringing a pet. He was
glad to see Gabriel waving at him from a dark corner.
As he made his way toward Gabriel he saw that all the
others had reached the café before him. They were sitting around one of the
largest tables. Olivia had a white rabbit on her lap, and its mate was sitting
on Tancred. Gabriel had his usual assortment of gerbils, one of which was
sitting on Emma's shoulder. Lysander had brought a parrot in a cage and Fidelio
was holding a startled-looking cat.
"She's deaf," Fidelio explained. "On
account of the noise in our house, but her eyesight's terrific."
The cat bristled when it saw Runner Bean, but the big
dog ignored her and ran over to a group of dogs by the window.
Tancred's yellow hair began to crackle. "Who's
this?" he asked, frowning at Benjamin.
"Benjamin," said Charlie. "He lives on
my road and I've known him forever."
"OK." Tancred's hair subsided. "Sorry
I'm just a bit edgy"
"Who isn't?" said Gabriel.
"We're not, are we?" Olivia grinned at Emma.
"Not a bit," said Emma, pulling a gerbil
from under her collar.
"Hi there, Benjamin," said Lysander with a
huge smile. "Don't you take any notice of us. We're Charlie's school
friends. I'm Lysander. He's Tancred. You just sit down and have a bite to
eat."
"Thanks." Benjamin eyed the plates of food
on the table and sat down beside Charlie. They both helped themselves to a
large portion of chocolate cake.
"We didn't have to pay for anything today,"
Gabriel told them. "Mr. Onimous said it was a special occasion and to take
as much as we wanted."
"I suppose it will be special — if everything
works out," said Charlie, remembering why he was here.
"It will!" Mr. Onimous had suddenly appeared
at Charlie's side. "We'd better make a start, Charlie my lad," he
said. “Are you coming alone, or do you want to bring a friend?"
Charlie looked around the group of expectant faces. He
didn't want to disappoint anyone.
"I don't want it to be me, if you don't
mind," Benjamin said helpfully
"Is he going into the ruin?" asked Gabriel,
lowering his voice.
"He is," said Mr. Onimous.
"Then we'll be more use here." Gabriel
looked at Lysander and Tancred.
"Fidelio, will you come?" asked Charlie.
Fidelio jumped to his feet. "You bet!"
Olivia gave a huge sigh. "I suppose I've done my
bit."
"It's not over yet," Emma reminded her.
With a furtive look around the café, Lysander slid the
wand out of his sleeve and handed it to Charlie. "Good luck," he
murmured.
"Thanks." Charlie tucked the wand under his
jacket.
Fidelio passed his cat to Gabriel and then he and
Charlie followed Mr. Onimous to the back of the counter. They walked through a
tinkling bead screen and into the kitchen.
Mr. Onimous showed them to a small door at the back of
the kitchen, and then they were in a long passage lined with shelves of
disgusting-looking pet food.
"Come along," urged Mr. Onimous as the boys
gazed around them.
The shelves came to an end and the passage narrowed.
They were now walking on a rough stone floor and this very soon became a path
of hard earth. As Mr. Onimous scurried along he seemed more and more to take on
the appearance of a mole or some other burrowing creature.
Charlie realized that the ceiling was now so low he
could rest the flat of his hand on its damp surface. It was getting darker.
When the light had almost petered out they stepped into a small round cavern.
It was lit by a single lantern hanging from the ceiling, and all around the
walls huge tea chests stood shoulder to shoulder with plastic sacks and wooden
crates. There seemed to be no way out except the way they had come.
"Now what?" Fidelio whispered to Charlie.
Mr. Onimous had ears as sharp as a rabbit's. ”Aha!"
he said, making both boys jump nervously. "You're wondering where it is,
aren't you? You think Mr. Onimous has led you into a nasty trap, don't
you?"
Charlie gulped. "Of course not."
Fidelio asked, "Where what is?"
Mr. Onimous beamed, and then, with amazing speed, he
spun a crate away from the wall. And there it was. A very very small and
ancient door. The little man's smile disappeared. His next words were spoken
in such a solemn tone Charlie would never forget them. "Before you go in I
want you boys to swear never to tell a soul about this door."
"I swear," said Charlie.
"I swear," Fidelio repeated gravely
Mr. Onimous nodded. "Good." He reached
inside his woolly shirt and pulled out a small key on a gold chain. Putting a
pawlike hand on the door, he fit the key into the lock and gently turned it.
With a light creak the door swung open.
"The cats are there," said Mr. Onimous.
"They'll take you. Off you go now I'm going to lock the door behind you.
We can't take any chances."
Charlie peered into the gloom behind the door. He
could just make out the huge stones that formed the walls of a tunnel. A distant
glowing light began to draw nearer and Charlie breathed, "I see
them."
He stepped into the tunnel. Fidelio was right behind
him. They walked in single file, treading softly on a smooth cobbled floor.
Charlie had expected a rough, earthy burrow but the tunnel had been carefully
built. The large red stones fitted neatly together, even in the low ceiling.
"It's very old." Fidelio's hushed voice
echoed down the tunnel. "I wonder who used it."
"Soldiers perhaps," said Charlie. "It
would have been a secret way out, if the castle was under siege."
“And children," said Fidelio. "Now it's
Henry's way out."
They could see the cats clearly now but before the
boys could reach them the three animals turned and began to hurry along the
tunnel ahead of them.
Charlie and Fidelio began to run. The tunnel was far
from straight and they had to make several turns before they could see a
welcome speck of daylight in the distance. Instead of making for the light,
however, the cats swerved away from the main passage and disappeared into a
long fissure. The boys hesitated and then squeezed themselves into a tunnel that
was so narrow they had to walk sideways. At the end of a very nasty journey
they inched themselves past a pillar and stepped into an astonishing room.
The ground was paved with tiny squares of color. On a
white background, lines of red, orange, and yellow radiated from a huge red
circle. The walls were covered in frescoes; golden domes blazed beneath blue
skies and tall robed figures paced through leafy arbors. The vaulted roof
echoed the pattern on the floor, only here the central circle was open to the sky
"It's the sun," murmured Charlie. "See,
the pattern is like the rays of the sun."
"There's so much light." Fidelio gazed up at
the tiny circle in the roof. "It must be a trick — or magic."
"It was on his shield," said Charlie.
"The Red King's shield was like a burning sun. It's his room. His own,
special place. I don't think anyone's been here since he left."
"Not ever?" asked Fidelio.
Charlie shook his head. "I don't think so."
At that moment neither boy could have explained his
feelings. The place affected them in very different ways. While Fidelio was
uneasy and eager to move on, Charlie felt at home and deeply comforted.
"The cats have gone," Fidelio observed.
"Now what?"
Charlie noticed a red-gold leaf beside his foot. How
did it get there? Through the roof? He studied the ten pillars surrounding the
courtyard. They were made of the same deep red rock as the rest of the castle,
and there was only the space the width of a finger between the pillars and the
wall. Except for two standing opposite to each other. They had entered the
courtyard by a narrow opening behind one of the pillars. Charlie walked over to
investigate the other.
Screened by the pillar, a small round window gave onto
a dark wood. Squinting through the window Charlie could see a green glade
beyond the trees. In the center of the glade there was a black rock. The three
cats were sitting on top of it.
"It's here," cried Charlie. "Fidelio,
it's here."
Fidelio ran over to Charlie. "What is?"
"The dungeon. There's a rock, just like Olivia said.
See? Where the cats are sitting."
Fidelio gave a low whistle. "You first, Charlie.
I'll be right behind you."
They scrambled through the round hole and dropped to
the ground. When they looked back all they could see was a wall of ivy No one
would have guessed what lay behind it.
Charlie led the way The cats yowled encouragement as
he knelt in the grass and called, "Henry? Henry are you there? It's me,
Charlie!"
"Charlie?" From a narrow gap beside the rock
there came a sound of shuffling footsteps. And then Charlie was looking into a
pair of large gray eyes. "Good to see you, Charlie," said Henry
"Great to see you, Henry Sorry it's taken so
long. But we're going to get you out of there, right now"
"How?" The gray eyes looked anxious.
"Well, I've got something powerful here."
Charlie drew the wand out of his jacket and held it above the eyes.
"Can you see it?"
"But it's just a stick." Henry sounded
disappointed. "That won't do it, Charlie."
Fidelio peered over Charlie's shoulder. “Actually
Henry it's a wand," he said, "and wands can do anything."
"Oh! Who's this?" Henry asked.
"My friend Fidelio," said Charlie.
"He's great in a crisis. Never panics. I think you'd better get away from
there now Henry Just in case the rock moves the wrong way."
"I won't be able to breathe if it does
that," Henry said in a scared voice.
"Don't worry It'll work," Fidelio said
confidently
"If you say so."
The eyes disappeared and they heard Henry shuffle
down into his dungeon.
Charlie stepped away from the rock. He held out the
wand. "Suppose it doesn't work," he muttered.
"Of course it'll work," said Fidelio.
"Think where it came from, Charlie. Believe in yourself"
Encouraged, Charlie flourished the wand in the air,
and then, pointing it at the rock, he chanted,
Sumidar gareg
umma!
The three cats leaped off the rock, but nothing else
happened.
"Things like this never work the first
time," said Fidelio. "Like our car. It always needs two goes."
Charlie repeated the Welsh words, pronouncing them
exactly as his uncle had told him. The rock didn't move. A cold, panicky
feeling clutched his stomach. Perhaps Skarpo had tricked him. He shouldn't
have chosen the wand. It was useless.
"Useless, useless," Charlie muttered.
"What are we going to do, Fido?"
"Try again," said Fidelio. "Only this
time use a different kind of voice. You sound like someone pretending to be a
wizard. A bit false. And too bossy I bet a real wizard treats his wand like a
friend. Try and sound more friendly and more polite."
"OK." Charlie cleared his throat. Once again
he pointed the wand at the black rock, and when he spoke the words, he tried to
imagine that he was speaking to his uncle Paton; polite but friendly
Sumidar gareg
ummal
This time, as soon as Charlie had spoken, the wand
became warm in his hand. It felt as if it were turning through his fingers. A
red glow spread through the wood and its silver tip sparkled like a firework.
With a sudden explosion of light the wand flew out of Charlie's hand and landed
on the rock.
All around the glade, birds fluttered into the sky
calling anxiously Fidelio and the cats rushed to Charlie's side as the rock
gave a thunderous groan. There was a deep underground boom, a crushing rumble,
and the rock slowly rolled backward.
The boys were so amazed they stood rooted to the spot,
and then Henry's head emerged from a dark hole beside the rock.
"Hurrah!" he said. "I'm out. Well done,
Charlie!"
They were shocked by his appearance. Never had they
seen a boy so drained of life. His face was white and pinched and the circles
around his eyes made him look like an exhausted owl.
Fidelio and Charlie took an arm each and helped Henry
to climb the rest of the way out of the pit. He was a bit unsteady but so happy
to be alive and free, he couldn't stop himself from doing a skip and a jump as
soon as he was out.
Charlie looked down into the pit. It was hard to
imagine how it must have felt to be trapped in that awful place for two whole
weeks.
The wand had lost its strange glow and was once again
a pale stick with a silver tip. Henry gazed at it in awe, as Charlie slipped it
under his jacket.
"I'll tell you how I got it," Charlie said,
"but not here. Let's go before someone comes snooping around."
They hurried across the glade and through the woods,
but when they reached the ivy-clad wall, the round window seemed to have
disappeared. Fidelio eventually found it by clambering up the thick vines and
pulling aside a long curtain of leaves.
One by one, they wriggled through the window; and then
dropped into the domed room. Henry gazed
at the painted walls in amazement, "It's like the world in the Time
Twister," he murmured, "the world of the Red King." He would
have liked to stay longer but the others hurried him across the room. They
squeezed past the pillar and entered the tunnel. The cats had followed them
every step of the way and now lit the darkness with their bright coats.
As they made their way along the tunnel, Charlie told
Henry about Skarpo, the sorcerer, and the stolen Welsh wand. Henry found all
this rather hard to take in, so soon after his escape. It was easier for him to
understand Fidelio's description of the Pets' Café and, after two weeks on
little more than bread and water, he began to look forward to the delicious
cakes that he would find there.
They had almost reached the end of the tunnel, when
the small door into the café was flung open and a tall figure appeared. The
boys stopped. It was difficult to see the stranger's face. And then Mrs.
Onimous ran toward them, frantically waving her hands.
"Oh, boys," she cried. "It's no use. A
dreadful thing has occurred. It's an ambush!"
"What?" said Charlie. What's happened?"
"Dr. Bloor and one of your aunts are in the café.
They're watching every move we make."
This was very bad news.
"Maybe we could sneak Henry out while they're
eating," Charlie suggested.
"Not a chance, dear." She peered down at
Henry "So you're the young traveler. What a thrill to meet you, dear. I'm
Mrs. Onimous."
"How do you do?" Henry shook her hand.
"I've been looking forward to one of your cakes," he said.
Mrs. Onimous beamed. "Then you shall have one
very soon, dear. But you'll have to stay here for a bit, nice and quiet, while
your friends come back with me."
"We can't leave Henry here!" said Charlie.
"You'll have to, dear. They saw you both come
into the café. Your aunt has been asking where you were. I told her you were helping in
the kitchen, but who knows if she believed me. She'll be behind the counter and
nosing in the kitchen before we know where we are."
Mrs. Onimous took Charlie and Fidelio by the arm and
drew them up the tunnel and into the store room. The last thing Charlie saw
before she closed the door was Henry's pale, stricken face.
"I'm sorry Henry" Charlie whispered.
"You won't have to stay there for long. There'll be a storm, but you mustn't
worry It's to protect you. Wait for Mr. Onimous. He'll tell you when it's safe
to come out."
"Good-bye, Charlie," said Henry
Charlie shivered when Mrs. Onimous locked the door.
Henry's words had sounded so sad and final.
"I didn't think I'd have to leave him in the dark
again," he muttered, as Mrs. Onimous led the way back to the kitchen.
"It won't be for long," said Fidelio.
Charlie wasn't sure. How long would his aunts be
watching the café? Who knew what could happen in the next few hours. When
darkness fell, the beast would be about.
When the two boys walked back into the café they found
Lucretia Yewbeam staring at them from a table in the center of the room. Dr.
Bloor sat opposite her. Lucretia gave a nod and the headmaster turned his head
in their direction. As the boys made their way over to their friends, they
could feel two pairs of eyes watching them.
"We were getting
worried," said Olivia. "Did
,_ ....
"Yes," said Charlie.
"Shhh!" said Gabriel. "Let's get out of
here. I've got a feeling there are spies everywhere."
The eight children filed past Dr. Bloor's table. Dr. Bloor
gave them a curt nod and Lysander said, "Afternoon, Dr. Bloor!"
Lucretia Yewbeam glared at Charlie and said,
"Earning pocket money Charlie? 1 hope you'll be putting it toward your
school fees."
"What?" Charlie's jaw dropped. He couldn't
think what his aunt was talking about.
Fidelio came to the rescue. "They pay us very
well, Matron," he said. "We do the washing up and sometimes they let
us make the sandwiches."
"Do they now?" said the Matron. "Pity
you don't do more of that at home, Charlie. It seems that children won't do
anything these days unless they're paid for it."
Dr. Bloor was about to agree when there was a loud
yelp from the floor. Charlie had stepped on a hairless tail beside Dr. Bloor's
foot.
"Look where you're going, boy!" barked the
headmaster.
"Sorry Sir!" Charlie realized that Blessed
must have been dragged along to the café as Dr. Bloor's pet companion.
Aunt Lucretia had brought something in a cage, though
it was impossible to guess what it was. The cage was made of thick wire mesh
and all that could be seen was a large blue blob.
"Snake!" whispered Fidelio.
Charlie hurried on.
As they stepped out onto Frog Street, someone in red
boots leaped out of sight around the corner.
Aunt Venetia again," Charlie muttered grimly
Lysander and Tancred sprinted up to High Street, but
the red boots had vanished in a crowd of busy shoppers. However, when Charlie
caught up with his friends he saw someone else. There, sitting on a bench, was
Grandma Bone.
Charlie marched up to his grandmother. "What are
you doing here, Grandma?" he asked.
"Why does one usually sit beside a bus
stop?" she said coolly "One is waiting for a bus, of course. You're
very popular today Charlie. Lots of friends, I see."
"Yes," said Charlie. He walked on.
When they were some distance from Grandma Bone,
Olivia's curiosity couldn't be contained any longer. "How did you get
Henry out?" she begged. "Did the wand work?"
Charlie told them everything that happened in the
castle.
"So he's stuck in the tunnel," groaned
Olivia. "Now what?"
"The rest is up to my Uncle Paton," said
Charlie.
They had reached the traffic lights and Gabriel
spotted his mother, waiting in her Land Rover on the other side of the road.
She had promised to give Lysander and Tancred a lift back to the Heights.
Before he crossed the road, Tancred turned to Charlie
and said, "I think we're due for a storm. It'll get a few of these
busybodies off the streets."
Charlie had just caught sight of Aunt Eustacia,
watching them from the doorway of the pharmacy “A storm would be great,"
he said.
"You're on," said Tancred.
As the three older boys crossed the road, Tancred's
hair stood up in stiff tufts and a cold breeze blew into Charlie's face.
Raindrops began to spatter the pavement.
"Good old Tancred," said Fidelio.
"Let's get home before the storm gets going."
Charlie agreed to let everyone know when Henry was
safe and then, as thunder rumbled in the distance, Emma and Olivia headed off
to Ingledew's Books. Fidelio hurried away through a sea of umbrellas, and
Charlie, Benjamin, and his dog rushed back to Filbert Street.
"I'll come over after tea," Benjamin called
as Charlie leaped up the steps to number nine.
"See you!" Charlie let himself in and ran
straight up to his uncle's room.
Paton was waiting for him. "Did it all go
according to plan?" he asked.
“Almost," said Charlie. "But I had to leave
Henry in the tunnel. Dr. Bloor was in the café, and the aunts were everywhere.
Even Grandma Bone was watching us."
"Calm down, Charlie," said his uncle.
"They'll have to give up soon. There's a old storm brewing out there, and my sisters hate
getting wet. Mr. Onimous will take care of Henry All we've got to do is
wait."
"But for how long?"
"We should be safe by ten o'clock," said
Paton. "I'll phone the Pets' Café to make sure all is well, and
then we'll pop along and collect our Henry It's going to be quite a night,
Charlie."
Uncle Paton's dark eyes shone with confidence, so why
did Charlie feel so uneasy?
"We shouldn't have left him in the tunnel,"
he murmured.
THE TIME TWISTER
Henry had fallen asleep. A crack of thunder woke him up and
he scrambled to his feet. Charlie had warned him that there would be a storm,
but he didn't expect it to sound like this. Another boom echoed down the
tunnel, and something scurried through the dark behind him. One of the cats
pounced. There was a squeal and the crunch of bones.
This was worse than being in the pit. Henry thought of
the room where a red sun sent bright rays across the floor. It was a cheerful
place and he longed to be there again.
"Why shouldn't I?" he said to himself.
"They'll come and find me when it's time."
He set off toward the comfort of the bright room.
Immediately as he moved away from the café door, the cats leaped around him
meowing loudly. They seemed disturbed to find him walking in the wrong
direction.
"I'm not going far," Henry told the cats.
"Just to the sun room."
They followed him down the dark tunnels and into the
room. When he spread his cape on the red sun and lay down, they relaxed and sat
close to him, washing themselves vigorously
Light from the hole in the domed roof began to fade.
Soon the sky was inky black. The storm raged on, and lightning lit the
patterned walls with sudden fierce flashes.
Undisturbed by thunder or lightning, the three cats
curled up and went to sleep.
Who knows what made Henry do what he did next? Perhaps
it was the sound that came from the round window? Some might have thought it
was the wind, or raindrops falling through the branches. Henry thought he heard
someone sobbing. It reminded him of James. He could never hear that sound
without wanting to do something about it.
The cats slept on as Henry tiptoed to the round window
and climbed out. He had only taken a few steps through the woods when there was
a deep snarl behind him.
Henry ran. He tore around the glade where the dark pit
gaped beside the rock. He mounted the wooded bank beyond the rock, while the
beast stalked him through the trees, grunting hungrily
Henry searched desperately for a way out of the glade.
His fingers tore at dry rock, walls of ivy and branches of thorn. All at once,
a flash of lightning showed him a stone archway and he leaped through it. He
found himself in a dark, damp passage where the ground was covered in thick,
slippery moss. Stumbling blindly up a steep incline, Henry made his way toward
the streaks of lightning that lit the far end of the passage.
The grunts and snarls of the beast echoed behind him
as he crawled through a network of planks and then fell onto the stones of a
large courtyard. Without looking back, Henry got to his feet and rushed through
the huge arch that led into the garden.
As he tore across the wet grass the noise of the storm
intensified. A howling wind swept rain across the garden in torrents and, by
the time Henry reached the academy he was soaked to the skin.
The garden door was unlocked and Henry thankfully
leaped inside, slamming the door behind him. At the top of the stairs, on the
other side of the hall, Billy Raven stood staring at him. The white-haired boy
didn't say a word, he just watched impassively as Henry rushed for the nearest
door: the door into the west wing. He didn't have long to hide. Billy wouldn't
waste any time. In a few minutes the Bloors would know their prisoner had
escaped and they would be searching the building.
Henry began to climb the stairs up to the music room.
He had been safe there before. The music teacher was a strange man, but Henry
knew he could trust him. The storm was now at its height. The whole tower
rocked under deafening thunder, and lightning flashed continuously through
every window
Henry had almost reached the top of the spiraling
stairs when there was a shout from below
"He came in here!"
Two pairs of footsteps could be heard running up the
tower steps. Henry leaped forward, missed a step, and tumbled back onto the
floor.
"Hear that? He's up there!" shouted Manfred.
Henry picked himself up. He began to wonder if there
was any point in trying to escape. They would find him in the end. He gazed
hopelessly up the narrow stairs, and gave a sigh of despair. The next moment,
his arm was touched by a slim, gloved hand.
Mrs. Bloor was standing beside him. An utterly changed
Mrs. Bloor. Gone were her dark clothes. Now she wore a red coat and a brightly
patterned scarf. She had a violin case tucked under her arm and in her free
hand she carried a small leather bag. Her hair shone and her eyes were
sparkling.
"It's time to go, Henry" she said, uncurling
her crippled hand. "Look!"
Henry saw the Time Twister glowing against her dark
glove. He looked away quickly
"We'll go together," said Mrs. Bloor.
"Take my arm and come this way."
Without thinking, Henry grasped Mrs. Bloor's left arm
as she hurried through the door behind her. It led into one of the long, dark
corridors in the west wing.
Mrs. Bloor began to run. "The time is
perfect," she said. "There was a storm, you see, the night they broke
my fingers. I can go back, now to the way I was. I can leave before they catch
me." She put on a sudden spurt and Henry almost tripped as he tried to
keep up with her.
"Suppose ..."
he said breathlessly. "Suppose you go back to the wrong place."
"I won't, Henry I've been thinking so hard about
where I want to be. I trust this ancient marble. I'll be five minutes ahead of
them. This time I'll be through the doors and hailing a taxi before anyone
knows I've gone."
"I don't think I can come with you," Henry
panted. "But you must."
A voice bellowed down the corridor, "Dorothy
STOP!"
"Faster, Henry!" cried Mrs. Bloor.
Henry felt as though his lungs were being crushed by
an elephant. He couldn't keep running. He'd never breathe again.
"MANFRED, GET THEM!" roared Dr. Bloor.
As Manfred came bounding after the runaways, a short
fat shape ambled across the corridor. There was a loud yell and Manfred tripped
over Blessed. He fell headlong onto the floorboards, groaning and swearing.
"Blasted, wretched, hateful. . ."
While Manfred cursed the old dog, Mrs. Bloor swerved
around a corner and under a low arch. Beyond the arch a flight of stone steps
ascended to a narrow window
"Bother," Mrs. Bloor panted as she mounted
the steps. "I didn't mean to come this way but there's no help for it.
Come along, Henry"
Henry had by now let go of Mrs. Bloor's arm. He was of
two minds whether to follow her, but he didn't seem to have a choice.
"Come on, come on," she urged.
When she reached the top of the steps, Mrs. Bloor
unlatched the window and appeared to leap into the air. Henry froze as a bolt
of lightning lit the sky. Had his companion
fallen to her death, or was she already twisting back through time? He
scrambled up the steps and looked out.
Mrs. Bloor was standing in a wide passage between the
roof and a long parapet. From the top of the parapet strange stone beasts
looked out over the garden and the dark, faraway trees.
"Come on, dear," said Mrs. Bloor.
"Don't be afraid." She was gazing at the Time Twister, and the
glowing glass ball threw dazzling colors out into the night sky
Henry couldn't help himself. He stepped toward her.
Behind him came the thud of heavy footsteps.
Without taking her eyes from the Time Twister, Mrs.
Bloor hitched the strap of her bag over her shoulder and grabbed a corner of
Henry's cape. “A few more seconds," she breathed. "I can feel it,
Henry Soon we'll be gone."
She ran beside the parapet, tugging Henry with her,
and laughing happily Henry wondered what would happen when they reached the end
of the roof. But they never got that far. Mrs. Bloor's red coat began to shiver
under the fierce white lightning. Her pale hair sparkled and scattered in a
burst of starlight.
"Henry," came a soft, disembodied voice.
"There was something I meant to tell Charlie. I know
where his father . . . but now it's too late . . . he'll never . . . oh, Henry
we're going!"
But Henry didn't want to go out there, to another
world he didn't know He'd only just got used to this one. Slipping out of his
cape, he flung himself behind one of the massive chimneys that rose above the
roof. From the chimney's deep shadow he watched Mrs. Bloor twist into a bolt of
rainbow colors — and disappear. There was a gentle floating laugh — and then
nothing.
The wind died and the thunder rolled away but in a
last brilliant shaft of lightning, Henry saw Manfred Bloor standing by the
parapet. He was looking up into the sky and calling out. It was a faint
strangled cry and Henry could have been mistaken, but it sounded very like the
word "Mommy!"
"Has she gone, then?" Dr. Bloor shouted from
the window
"They've both gone," said Manfred, blowing
his nose. He picked up Henry's blue cape. "The boy left this behind. I
dare say he won't be needing it where he's gone."
"Wherever that is," muttered Dr. Bloor.
"Great-grandpa will be disappointed," said
Manfred as he walked away from Henry's hiding place. "He wanted to have a
bit more fun with the little beast."
Henry shuddered. What sort of fun? he wondered.
Manfred stepped through the window and closed it with
a bang.
A wan moon peeped through the rolling clouds. Henry
moved out from the shadows and looked down into the garden. He had no idea how
he was going to get away without being seen. The Bloors were bound to catch him
before he reached the ruin. And even if he got that far, the beast would be
waiting for him.
He ran to the window and found that it was locked.
Cold and hungry Henry thought of the Pets' Café and the cakes Mrs. Onimous had
promised him.
"It just wasn't to be," he sighed.
He had almost decided to risk breaking the window
when something swept through the air above him. A huge bird landed on the
parapet, its great wings glistening with raindrops. Henry had never seen such a
gigantic bird. Its beak had a cruel curve and each of its massive talons was
like a shining scimitar. And yet Henry wasn't afraid. He sensed something
friendly about the great creature, something almost kindly
As he approached the bird it bent its head. Henry put
his arms around the long feathered neck and closed his eyes.
************************************
At seven o'clock Benjamin went to see Charlie.
"I want to know what's happening about Henry,"
said Benjamin.
"I'm going to get Uncle Paton to ring Mr. Onimous
soon," Charlie said. "It's horrible just waiting and waiting and not
knowing what's going on."
Benjamin and Runner Bean followed Charlie up to his
room. Grandma Bone hadn't come home and this was worrying Charlie. Was she
still waiting outside the Pets' Café? Would she be lurking there when Uncle
Paton drove around to collect Henry? And what of the Yewbeam aunts? Was Henry
still safe in the tunnel? That was another worrying question.
After a while Charlie couldn't stand it any longer. He
went to his uncle's room and knocked on the door. "It's me," said
Charlie. "Uncle Paton, do you think you could call Mr. Onimous? I'm
worried about Henry."
"Very well," sighed Paton. "If I can
find my phone."
At that moment the front door slammed and someone
marched across the hall. Charlie recognized Grandma Bone's footsteps and ran
back to his room.
A few minutes later Uncle Paton's troubled face looked
around Charlie's door.
"I found the phone," said Paton. "I
called Mr. Onimous. Henry's gone!"
"What!" Charlie stared at his uncle in
horror. "But how? Did Mr. Onimous look?"
"He told me he went right to the end of the
tunnel and out into the ruin. There was no sign of Henry The poor little man is
very distressed."
"Henry went into the room with the sun,"
Charlie murmured. "He'd feel safe there. But why didn't he come
back?"
"We'll have to wait," said Paton.
"That's all we can do. Wait and hope. My father will be waiting,
too."
“You mean . . ." Charlie suddenly realized what
Paton meant.
"Yes, I've told him about Henry That's where I
was hoping to take him, to live with his brother by the sea."
Waiting and hoping is a hard thing to do when you've
already been waiting and hoping for almost as long as you can bear it. Terrible
images kept springing into Charlie's mind. Henry being chased through the ruin,
captured, eaten alive.
Benjamin stayed as long as he could, but after another
half hour he told Charlie he'd have to go home or his mom would start to worry
"OK," Charlie said gloomily
As Benjamin turned to go, Runner Bean rushed to the
window and barked.
"Shhhhh!" said Benjamin.
The big dog barked again. He stood on his hind legs
and pawed the curtains.
"Shut up, Runner," said Benjamin.
"Grandma Bone'll catch us."
Runner Bean looked at his master and whined mournfully
"We don't go out through the window"
Benjamin said impatiently "Come on, Runner, this way."
"Ben!" Charlie jumped up. "I think
there's something out there." He went to the window and drew back the
curtains.
There was a large chestnut tree outside Charlie's
window Sitting on a wide branch was Henry Yewbeam. He waved at Charlie and
mouthed the word, "Hello!"
Charlie dashed downstairs and out of the front door.
He waited anxiously while Henry swung from a branch and dropped to the ground,
then the two boys ran into the house.
"Upstairs," Charlie whispered as he closed
the front door.
Henry quickly mounted the stairs, but before he
reached the top, Grandma Bone came out of the living room.
"Who's that boy?" she demanded.
"Benjamin." Charlie was halfway up the
staircase.
"Oh?" she looked suspicious. "I hope
that dog's not in your room."
"Of course not, Grandma."
Charlie followed Henry up to the landing, while
Grandma Bone walked across to the kitchen.
"In here," said Charlie, quickly drawing
Henry into his bedroom. "This is Benjamin."
"Hello! I'm Henry." While Charlie closed the
door Henry shook Benjamin's hand and then the paw that Runner Bean was eagerly
holding up to him. "I'm very pleased to meet you both," he said.
"Please don't be alarmed."
Benjamin realized he was staring at Henry with his
mouth open. "I'm Benjamin," he said. "You look quite
normal."
"He is normal," said Charlie. "He's
just . . ."
"Out of time," said Henry. He sat on the bed
and announced, "I'm free. I'm safe. The Bloors think I've gone back, so
they won't be looking for me."
"I don't understand," said Charlie.
"How did you get here?"
"It's a long story" said Henry and he began
to describe his extraordinary adventure.
"You say a bird rescued you!" Benjamin
exclaimed. "It must have been Emma!" said Charlie.
Benjamin and Henry looked baffled, so Charlie explained.
"I'd like to thank all your friends," said Henry "the ones who helped me."
Charlie told him there wouldn't be time to meet his
friends. "Tonight Uncle Paton's taking us to a place where you'll be
safe," he said. "We have to go before Grandma Bone finds out that
you're in the house."
"Where will I go?" Henry looked worried.
"You're going home. To the house by the sea. And
I'm coming with you. Just for the day It'll be the very first time I've seen my
great-grandpa."
Henry frowned. And who's he?"
"He's your brother, James."
"James?" cried Henry "Little Jamie?
He's still alive?"
If it hadn't been for Runner Bean, Henry might never
have seen his brother again. With a low rumbling growl the dog stared at the
door. Charlie pushed a startled Henry under the bed, and the door opened.
Grandma Bone stood on the threshold, glaring at Runner
Bean. "You're a liar, Charlie Bone," she said coldly "You did
have a dog in here. Get it out. Now!" She looked around the room, her long
nose wrinkling like a pug's. "Who else are you hiding? What's been going
on?"
"Nothing, Mrs. Bone," said Benjamin.
"My dog's scared of storms so 1 brought him over here to take his mind off
it."
"Storm's gone!" bellowed Grandma Bone.
"Hadn't you noticed? Now go home."
"Yes, Mrs. Bone." Benjamin shuffled meekly
past the tall woman in the doorway Runner Bean bared his teeth and directed one
of his best growls at Grandma Bone's skinny ankles.
"Aaaah!" she shrieked, backing out of the
door. "Get him away from me."
When Benjamin and his dog were safely out of the
house, Grandma Bone looked in on Charlie and told him to get ready for bed.
"Yes, Grandma." He closed the door and ran
to the window. Benjamin had just reached
the other side of the road when Charlie looked out.
"Ben!" he called. "Pass on the news,
will you? Tell the others what happened?"
Grandma Bone gave up wondering about all the creaking
and whispering that went on in the house that night. As far as she was
concerned, Henry Yewbeam had disappeared into the past — or the future — so
whatever was going on was all childish nonsense and she couldn't be bothered
with it. She drank a stiff whiskey and went to sleep.
A J0URNEY TO THE SEA
Charlie told the rest of the household about Henry's
arrival, and, one by one, they began to visit the boy from the past.
Paton came first. He stood in the doorway for a
second, blinking speechlessly and then he strode up to Henry exclaiming,
"My dear, dear fellow, I can't believe it. This is just too wonderful for
words." He shook Henry's hand vigorously "I've heard so much about
you. My father idolized you, you know."
"Did he?" said Henry "1 suppose I'm your
uncle."
While Paton was still chuckling over this, Amy Bone
looked in.
"This is my mom," Charlie told Henry
And you're Henry" Mrs. Bone gazed at Henry as if
she couldn't quite believe her eyes. All that way," she murmured.
"All those years, I should say. So
it really can happen."
Was she thinking of his father? Charlie wondered. Was she wishing
that he too might come twisting through time to be with her again?
As Henry and Mrs. Bone solemnly shook hands, Henry
said, "Mrs. Bloor told me she knew. . ." and then he seemed to change
his mind.
There was no time to ask Henry what Mrs. Bloor knew
because, at that moment, Maisie arrived on the scene.
"He looks a bit like Charlie, doesn't he?"
she said.
"Mm. Just a little," said Amy
Wherever Henry had come from, it didn't matter to
Maisie; he was a boy in trouble and therefore in need of a hug. “You poor, poor
thing," she cried, almost squeezing the life out of him. "You look
half-starved. Come to the kitchen this minute and I'll cook up a feast."
"I don't think that'd be a good idea," said
Charlie. "Grandma Bone might come down."
"Drat Grandma Bone," said Maisie.
"What's she up to now? If she so much as lays a finger on this poor boy
I'll give her a good wallop."
"Maisie, dear, please lower your voice,"
said Paton in a quiet, but commanding tone. "If you want to help, you can
bring a snack up to Charlie's room. And we shall need food and blankets for a
long journey to the coast. I did mention it before."
“Yes, Paton," Maisie said patiently "I
hadn't forgotten."
"Come on, Mom, we've got work to do," said
Amy
The two women went downstairs to prepare a picnic
basket while Henry chose some of Charlie's clothes to wear in his new life.
"It'll be so strange," he said to Charlie.
"I was always the oldest. 1 took care of James. What's he going to make of
it all?"
"I can't wait to find out," said Charlie.
At ten minutes to twelve, Charlie and Henry climbed
into Uncle Paton's midnight blue car. They were followed by a pile of blankets
and pillows and a huge basket of food.
"You help yourselves whenever you're hungry,"
said Maisie as she stuffed cushions behind their heads and tucked blankets
around their legs.
Paton was already in the driver's seat glancing impatiently
at his watch. He was a man of habit and he liked to leave for the coast on the
stroke of midnight. As the great cathedral clock began to ring out across the
city he said, "Snuggle down, boys! We'll have breakfast by the sea."
The car doors were slammed and Mrs. Bone and Maisie
waved and blew kisses from the curb, as Paton drove slowly up Filbert Street.
In case of lamp accidents, he liked to keep to the side roads, and after
driving down several badly lit alleys, they were suddenly deep in the
countryside. Here there were no lights at all, except for the odd twinkle from
a cowshed or a porch light.
Charlie was beginning to drift off to sleep when a
question popped into his head. "You told my mom Mrs. Bloor knew
something," he said to Henry "What did she know?"
Henry yawned. "It was about your father," he
mumbled sleepily "Just before she disappeared she said there was
something she meant to tell you. I think she knew where your father was."
Charlie sat bolt upright, throwing his pillow to the
floor. "Didn't she tell you?" he demanded.
"No," Henry murmured. "She just
vanished."
"What did she say exactly?" Charlie asked
frantically
There was no answer. Henry had fallen asleep, and
Charlie didn't have the heart to wake him.
"Did you hear that, Uncle Paton?" said
Charlie. "Mrs. Bloor knew where my father was — or is."
"I heard, Charlie. Perhaps it means that he isn't
very far away We'll find him one day That's a promise."
Charlie thought he would never sleep after this
amazing piece of news, but before he knew it, his eyes were closed.
Whether he was awake or dreaming, Charlie could never
be sure, but at some time during their long journey to the sea, his uncle began
to talk about the Red King. Perhaps Charlie had mentioned the vanishing tree
he had seen in the snow or the strange red tree that had appeared in the king's
portrait, but Paton's words remained very clear in his head.
"I
believe he is a tree, Charlie. That's what my books seem to tell me. When the
king lived in the great forests with only the trees and his leopards for
company, he became a part of the forest himself Can trees move, you might ask?
Who can say? Who is to know if a tree
standing in a field at dawn, cannot later be seen in a castle ruin, or in the
shadows of a great park? Perhaps, one day you'll find out."
When Charlie opened his eyes again, he saw a great
sweep of gray sea. They were traveling along a narrow cliff road and light was
beginning to fill the sky He nudged Henry who was still asleep beside him.
Henry stirred and rubbed his eyes.
"Look!" said Charlie. "The sea!"
Henry looked out of the window "I know this
place," he cried. "We're nearly home."
"There's a few miles to go, yet," said
Paton. "Let's have breakfast."
There was a shout of agreement from the boys and soon
they were enjoying Maisie's feast. A cold wind was howling outside, and so they
ate in the car, watching the huge foamy breakers crashing onto the shore below.
When breakfast was over they set off again. The road
ran beside the sea almost the whole way and Charlie never tired of watching the
waves, the tumbling cliffs, and the misty islands far out in the water. And
then they turned a corner and Henry cried, "We're here!"
Ahead of them was a small bay where the sea was calm
and blue. As they drove down toward the beach, sunlight spilled over the
horizon and the water became a sheet of sparkling glass. It was like entering
another country Gone were the dark clouds and the winter wind. Gone were the
wild waves pounding the shingle.
"What's happened?" said Charlie.
"Everything's gone calm."
"Like a spell," breathed Henry
They parked on a patch of grass beside the beach. On
the other side of the road, Charlie could see a white house perched on top of a
steep cliff.
"Is that it?" he asked Henry.
Henry just nodded.
They crossed the road and climbed two flights of
whitewashed steps set into the cliff Uncle Paton went first with Charlie
following. But Henry hung back. He seemed to be afraid of what he might find in
the house at the top of the steps.
There was a porch with a blue painted door at the side
of the house. Paton let himself in and Charlie stepped in after him. They went
through another door and into a room that seemed to be full of sunlight.
An old man came toward them. His hair was white and
his eyes were gray and although he was obviously very old, his face looked young,
somehow as though all his wrinkles had come from smiling and sea weather.
"I saw you arrive," said the old man, giving
Paton a big hug. "So this is Charlie. Well, well, well! At last we
meet!"
"At last," said Charlie, while his
great-grandfather clutched him to his chest.
Henry was standing just inside the door. He was
staring at the old man. And then the old man saw him, and they just gazed at
each other, without saying a word.
At last Henry said, "Jamie!" as if somewhere
under all those wrinkles, hed suddenly seen his little brother; the boy he’d
left behind when he went to play his last game of marbles.
James Yewbeam still couldn't speak. His eyes had a
glittery tearful look, and Paton took Charlie aside while the two brothers
hugged each other.
It was almost too much for the old man. He sank into
an armchair and shook his head, over and over again. "I can't believe
it," he said. "It's really you!" He reached into his pocket and
brought out a small leather bag. "Look, Henry I've still got the
marbles."
Henry sat on the arm of his chair. "I'll teach
you how to play Ring Taw" he said.
“About time, too," said James with a laugh.
And then another extraordinary thing happened. A door
opened and Cook walked into the room. Or was it Cook?
"Cook?" said Charlie.
"Not Cook," said the woman. "I'm Cook's
sister, Pearl."
"So that's why the sea was so calm," Henry
murmured.
Pearl nodded and gave him a big smile. It turned out
that Pearl had been James Yewbeam's housekeeper for twenty years. Ever since
his wife died.
They all began to talk about Henry's future. How he
would go to the local school beyond the bay
"It's small and friendly" said Pearl.
"Henry will fit in perfectly He can start in the summer term, when
Charlie's filled him in a bit about all these newfangled things like cell
phones and videos and whatnot."
It was decided that Charlie would come to see Henry
once a month, every time that Paton visited his father.
"And over the holidays, too," said Henry
"Charlie must come here over the holidays."
"Of course," said Paton.
Charlie had never had a vacation by the sea. It was something
he'd always dreamed about, but he'd never really believed it would happen. He
looked through the window at the sparkling water and the sandy beach.
He didn't have to wait long to visit the beach. Old
James Yewbeam had been awake all night, and now, after all the excitement he
fell fast asleep in his chair. Paton went upstairs for a snooze before his long
drive back to the city and Pearl began to prepare a meal.
"You two should go down to the shore," she
told the boys. "You both look as if you could do with some fresh
air."
They didn't need any more encouragement. Charlie and
Henry spent the rest of the day on the beach. They skimmed pebbles across the
water, jumped over rock pools, and explored the caves that Henry knew so well.
All too soon night clouds began to roll in across the
water, and Uncle Paton was calling the boys to supper.
They sat around a table in the bay window where they
could watch the moonlit water. There were candles on the table but the rest of
the room was in darkness. Old Mr. Yewbeam always removed the lightbulbs on
Paton's visits. As Charlie dug into the delicious supper that Pearl had
prepared, he couldn't help thinking of Cook in her little underground rooms,
far away from the sea and the sun.
"I wish Cook could find a place like this to
live," he said.
Pearl told him that Cook was very happy where she was.
She loved keeping an eye on the children at Bloor's Academy "We talk on
the phone for hours," said Pearl. ”And Treasure — that's her name —
Treasure tells me everything that's been going on with you children of the Red
King, and sometimes I think it's me who's missing out."
"But now you've got Henry," said Charlie.
"Now I've got Henry" Pearl's eyes twinkled. “And
I can see that he's going to be quite a handful."
They all laughed at this, and then Uncle Paton stood
up, saying, "Come on, Charlie. We've got to get you home, or you'll never
be awake in time for school tomorrow."
"School," sighed Charlie. He wished he could
have stayed a little longer.
The two brothers — one so old and the other still
young — stood at the top of the cliff steps and waved good-bye as Paton and
Charlie climbed into the midnight blue car. Charlie snuggled down in the seat
beside his uncle and the car roared into life.
"I think Henry's going to be OK, don't you?"
he said.
"OK?" said Paton. "He's going to be
absolutely splendid. Well done, Charlie!"
paton has a
party
Every year, on Uncle Paton's birthday Grandma Bone and
her sisters took a short trip. They hated having to buy presents or indulge in
"nonsensical celebrations," as Grandma Bone put it.
This year, Paton's birthday was on the first day of
the break. Maisie decided that before Charlie and his uncle set off for the coast
again, Paton should have a real party for a change.
"We've never had a real party here before,"
she said. "But Charlie's new friends have got such interesting parents,
we really ought to get to know them."
Invitations were sent out and, surprisingly everyone
accepted. Even the judge.
The party was kept secret from Grandma Bone in case
she tried to put a stop to it. Maisie managed to hide the champagne under a
sack in the pantry and the birthday cake was put in a crate marked CAULIFLOWER. Grandma Bone hated cauliflower so she kept
well away
from it.
On the morning before the party Charlie carried his
grandmother's suitcase down the stairs. Grandma Bone was right behind him when
he crossed the hall to the front door. There was a bang and the sound of breaking
glass. Charlie dropped the case and look around.
"Oh dear," said Grandma Bone. "That
picture's broken again, and Paton's just had new glass put in it."
The photo of Henry and his family lay on the floor;
the glass in the frame had smashed into a thousand pieces. Had Grandma Bone
knocked it down on purpose? She had a nasty smile on her face.
"Well, it's good riddance to him," she said,
pushing the frame with the toe of her boot.
Charlie didn't say a word. If only she knew the truth, he thought.
Once she was out of the house, everyone breathed a
sigh of relief.
"To work," cried Maisie. "Let's make
this old house like a palace!"
At seven o'clock, their work complete, Maisie and Paton, Charlie and his
mother, waited for their guests to arrive.
Tancred and his parents came first. As soon as the
Torssons walked through the front door, all the candles flickered violently A
few went out.
"Sorry!" boomed Mr. Torsson. "We'll try
and keep the breezes to ourselves."
Maisie was delighted. "How clever," she
said. "We could do with a bit of fresh air in here."
Benjamin and the detectives came next, and they were
quickly followed by Fidelio and the singing Gunns, and Gabriel and his parents.
Mr. Silk wrote murder mysteries and when he heard that Mr. and Mrs. Brown were
private detectives he whipped out his notebook and was soon deep in
conversation with Mr. Brown.
The Onimouses, the flame cats, and the Vertigos
arrived at the same time. Olivia's father was a famous film director and
immediately wanted to know if Mr. Onimous had considered a career in the
movies. "I'm casting for The Wind in
the Willows right now;" he said.
"I'll consider it," said Mr. Onimous.
By eight o'clock the party was in full swing. Charlie
thought everyone had arrived, but Paton told him that there was just one more
guest to come. A few minutes later the bell rang. Charlie opened the front
door and found Cook on the doorstep.
"Pearl's been keeping me up-to-date about Henry
It's a happy ending for him, after all."
"And Mrs. Bloor," said Charlie.
He took Cook into the kitchen where Gabriel Silk was
helping to serve the drinks.
"There's just one thing I'd like to know;"
said Cook, sipping her glass of wine. "Where did Dorothy find that
marble?"
"I gave it to her," said Gabriel.
"Well, she asked me for it."
Charlie
was surprised to hear this.
"Well,
well," said Cook, "and where did you find it?"
"Mr.
Pilgrim gave it to me," said Gabriel.
"Of
course." Cook nodded slowly "Mr. Pilgrim is a mysterious man."
"Where do you think Mrs. Bloor is now?" asked
Charlie.
"She'll be in Paris, just as she always intended.
She'll have gotten herself a nice little apartment and soon she'll be giving
violin lessons. Maybe she'll join an orchestra. Who knows? She'll be playing
her violin again, which is all she ever wanted. And she'll be safe." Cook
looked at Gabriel. "Thank you, Gabriel."
There was a sudden loud bang on the front door. It
came again. Someone wasn't even bothering to ring the bell.
BANG! BANG! BANG!
"Whoever . . . ?" said Paton.
Charlie followed his uncle to the front door.
Grandma Bone stood on the top step with her three
sisters behind her.
"What's going on?" she demanded.
"We're having a party" said Paton coolly
"What are you doing here?"
"How dare you have a party in my house. Stop it
this minute!" snapped Grandma Bone.
"Stop it!" said Lucretia.
"Everybody out!" said Eustacia.
"You can't have a party without our
permission," said Venetia.
"SHUT UP!" said Paton. "I can have a
party In case you've forgotten, it's half my house."
"What's the trouble, Paton?" Mr. Torsson had
come to see what the fuss was about.
"No trouble," said Paton. "Nothing I
can't handle."
Whether Paton could handle it or not was beside the
point. Mr. Torsson took one look at the four angry sisters, puffed up his
cheeks, and blew them down the steps and clean across the street.
Grandma Bone narrowly missed being hit by a bus.
Charlie watched in awe and astonishment as the Yewbeam
sisters picked themselves up, patted their hair, brushed their muddy clothes,
and shook their fists at Paton and Mr. Torsson.
A loud thundercrack and a sudden cloudburst sent them
scurrying away down the street, shrieking and cursing.
"We'll pay for that," Paton murmured.
"But not tonight," said Charlie.
As soon as the four sisters were well and truly gone,
Olivia Vertigo said, "Let's dance!"
"Yes, a dance!" cried Fidelio.
Before anyone could stop them they had moved the table
in the dining room and rolled up the rug. Emma put some music on the CD player
and all three of them began to dance around the room.
The other boys hung back at first, but then Maisie
grabbed the judge around the waist and whirled him onto the dance floor. After
that, no one else could resist the music. Soon the usually cold and cheerless
room was full of swaying, bobbing figures. Uncle Paton even managed to persuade
Miss Ingledew onto the floor. The room was so crowded they had to dance very
close. Charlie noted that Miss Ingledew didn't seem to mind a bit.
He couldn't see his mother in the room and so he went
to find her. She was sitting in the kitchen staring through the window Little
flakes of snow were drifting down from the sky but Charlie knew his mother
didn't see them.
"Dad will come back," said Charlie quietly
When Mrs. Bone turned to him, she didn't look sad at
all, in fact she was smiling.
"You know Charlie, I'm beginning to believe
you," she said. “After what happened to Henry I can believe almost
anything."
************************************
JENNY NIMMO
I was born in Windsor, Berkshire, England, and educated
at boarding schools in Kent and Surrey from the age of six until I was sixteen,
when I ran away from school to become a drama student/assistant stage manager
with Theater South East. I graduated and acted in repertory theater in various
towns and cities: Eastbourne, Tunbridge Wells, Brighton, Hastings, and Bexhill.
I left Britain to teach English to three Italian boys
in Amalfi, Italy On my return I joined the BBC, first as a picture researcher,
then assistant floor manager, studio manager (news), and finally director/adaptor
with Jackanory (a BBC storytelling program for children). I left the
BBC to marry Welsh artist David Wynn Millward and went to live in Wales in my
husband's family home. We live in a
very old converted water-mill, and the river is constantly threatening to break
in, which it has done several times in the past, most dramatically on my
youngest child's first birthday During the summer we run a residential school
of art, and I have to move my office, put down tools (typewriter and pencils),
and don an apron and cook! We have
three grown-up children, Myfanwy Ianto, and Gwenhwyfar.
SNEAK PREVIEW OF
Charlie Bone
and the Invisible Boy
BY JENNY NIMMO CHILDREN OF THE RED KING SERIES BOOK 3
A beautiful
girl arrives
at charlie's
house. her
eyes keep changing
color. she
lives with
the yewbeam
aunts and
seems
to have a
strange power
over them.
her name
is belle.
she
goes to Bloor's Academy with
Charlie, and
is put
in the
art
department.
Emma finds
a letter
that Mr. Boldova, the
new young
art
teacher, has dropped.
it reveals
that he
is the
older brother
of Ollie
Sparks, who
disappeared a
year ago,
made invisible
by an ancient
blue boa
constrictor. emma
and charlie
decide to help
mr. boldova
find ollie.
Billy Raven sees
Belle change
her shape
— she
becomes a very
old woman.
bllly is
terrified. the
old woman
Has come
to
help the bloors
control the
children of
the red
king, and
to
make sure they
don't rescue
ollie.
Can Charlie and
his friends
rescue Ollie and
make him visible
again?